JVC Car Stereo System KD G440 User Manual
CD RECEIVER  
KD-G440  
KD-G440  
KD-G440  
RECEPTOR CON CD  
RÉCEPTEUR CD  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
Para cancelar la demostración en pantalla, consulte la página 6.  
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.  
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.  
For customer Use:  
Enter below the Model  
No. and Serial No. which  
are located on the top or  
bottom of the cabinet. Retain  
this information for future  
reference.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
GET0526-001A  
[J]  
How to reset your unit  
CONTENTS  
Control panel ..................................  
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........  
4
5
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
6
6
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
Radio operations .............................  
7
Disc/USB device operations ..............  
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................  
Playing from a USB device....................................  
8
8
8
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Sound adjustments.......................... 11  
General settings — PSM .................. 12  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
Other external component  
operations ................................... 14  
How to use the M MODE button  
Title assignment.............................. 15  
More about this unit ........................ 15  
Maintenance ................................... 18  
Troubleshooting.............................. 19  
Specifications.................................. 21  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons will work  
as different function buttons.  
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Detaching the control panel  
To use these buttons for their original functions,  
press M MODE again.  
• Waiting for about 5 seconds without pressing any of  
these buttons will automatically cancels the functions  
mode.  
Attaching the control panel  
This unit is equipped with the steering wheel  
remote control function.  
• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate  
volume) for connection.  
3
Control panel  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons  
2 0 (eject) button  
o
;
a
s
d
f
Number buttons  
RPT (repeat) button  
RND (random) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
USB (Universal Serial Bus) input jack  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Time countdown indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer) indicators  
—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ, ROCK, POPS, USER  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
3
4
5
(standby/on attenuator) button  
Control dial  
Remote sensor  
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
BAND button  
Loading slot  
Display window  
EQ (equalizer) button  
DISP (display) button  
(control panel release) button  
SRC (source) button  
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
g
h
j
k
l
e 4 /¢ buttons  
r
t
y
u
i
AUX (auxiliary) button  
SEL (select) button  
M MODE button  
MO (monaural) button  
/
z
x
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (folder), (track/file)  
Main display  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
c
4
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
For USA-California Only:  
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery  
which contains Perchlorate Material—special  
handling may apply.  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.  
3
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
Warning:  
4
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or  
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as the dashboard) exposed to direct  
sunlight for a long time; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid the risk of accidents.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
SOURCE button  
5
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar  
tools.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
5
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
Getting started  
To restore the sound, press the  
button again.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
To turn off the power  
Ÿ
Basic settings  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages  
12 – 14.  
* You cannot select these sources if they are not  
ready or not connected.  
1
2
! For FM/AM tuner  
⁄ Adjust the volume.  
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK HOUR,” then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK MIN” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
Volume level appears.  
3
Finish the procedure.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 11 and 12.)  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Caution on volume setting:  
Digital devices (CD/USB) produce very little noise  
compared with other sources. Lower the volume  
before playing these digital sources to avoid  
damaging the speakers by sudden increase of the  
output level.  
Clock time is shown on the display for  
about 5 seconds. See also page 13.  
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Ÿ
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
! Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
2
3
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
Continued on the next page  
7
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.50MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
Disc / USB device  
operations  
1
2
: For built-in CD player operations.  
: For external USB device operations.  
Playing a disc in the unit  
3
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Listening to a preset station  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the  
source or eject the disc.  
1
To stop play and eject the disc  
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
or  
Playing from a USB device  
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB  
device (except HDD).  
All tracks in the USB device will be played repeatedly  
until you change the source.  
To check the other information while  
listening to an FM or AM station  
USB input jack  
~
Frequency = Clock =  
Station name* = (back to the  
beginning)  
* If no title is assigned to a station, “NO NAME” appears.  
To assign a title to a station, see page 15.  
8
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous track  
Ÿ
USB memory  
If a USB device has been attached...  
To go to the next or previous folder (for  
MP3/WMA)  
Playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• If a different USB device is currently attached,  
playback starts from the beginning.  
To detach the USB device, straightly pull it out from  
the unit.  
• Removing the USB device will also stop playback.  
Then, press SRC to listen to another playback source.  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA) directly  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
Cautions:  
• Avoid using the USB device if it might hinder your  
safety driving.  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
• Do not pull out or attach the USB device  
repeatedly while “READING” appears on the  
display.  
• Do not start a car engine if a USB device is  
connected.  
• This unit may not be able to play the files  
depending on the type of the USB device.  
• Operation and power supply may not work as  
intended for some USB devices.  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA, it is  
required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3/WMA):  
• You cannot connect a computer to the USB input  
jack of the unit.  
• Make sure all important data has been backed up  
to avoid losing the data.  
• Do not leave a USB device in the car, expose to  
direct sunlight, or high temperature to avoid  
deformation or cause damage to the USB device.  
• Some USB devices may not work immediately  
after you turn on the power.  
• For more details about USB operations, see page  
17.  
9
Other main functions  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or CD Text  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3/WMA, you can skip tracks within the same  
folder.  
A = Disc title/performer*1 = Track  
title*1 [ ] = B = (back to the beginning)  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
While playing an MP3/WMA disc or  
USB device  
1
• When “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 13)  
2
A = Album name/performer (folder  
name*2) [  
name*2) [  
beginning)  
] = Track title (file  
] = B = (back to the  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
• When “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF”  
3
A = Folder name [ ] = File name  
[
] = B = (back to the beginning)  
A
B
:
:
Clock with the current track number  
The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
2
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
10  
Selecting the playback modes  
Sound adjustments  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
Preset values  
BAS MID TRE LOUD  
Indication (For)  
7
USER  
(Flat sound)  
00  
00 00 OFF  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
The current track. [  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
TRACK RPT  
:
]
+03 00 +02 OFF  
+01 00 +03 OFF  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 OFF  
+03 00 +03 OFF  
FOLDER RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.  
[
]
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
RPT OFF  
:
Cancels.  
7
Random play  
POPS  
(Light music)  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
Mode  
Plays at random  
FOLDER RND * : All tracks of the current folder,  
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
then the tracks of the next folder  
and so on. [  
]
ALL RND  
RND OFF  
:
:
All tracks of the current disc or  
BAS: Bass MID: Mid-range TRE: Treble LOUD: Loudness  
USB device. [  
Cancels.  
]
* Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/USB).  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the  
display  
1
* Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W”  
(see page 13).  
2
Continued on the next page  
11  
Indication, [Range]  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
BASS *1, [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
listed in the table on pages 13 and 14.  
MIDDLE *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
1
TREBLE *1, [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
2
Select a PSM item.  
FADER *2, [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
BALANCE *3, [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
LOUD *4 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.  
SUB.W*5, [00 to 08, initial: 04]  
Adjust the subwoofer output level.  
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
VOL ADJ (volume adjust), [–05 to +05, initial: 00]  
Adjust the volume level of each source (except FM), in  
relation to the FM volume level. The volume level will  
automatically increase or decrease when you change  
the source.  
Finish the procedure.  
• Before making an adjustment, select the source you  
want to adjust.  
VOLUME, [00 to 50 or 00 to 30] *6  
Adjust the volume.  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the  
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently  
selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.  
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be  
applied to all sound modes.  
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W”  
(see page 13).  
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 14 for details.)  
2
*
3
4
*
*
5
6
*
*
12  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
DEMO  
Display  
demonstration  
• DEMO ON  
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
• DEMO OFF  
:
:
CLOCK DISP *1  
• CLOCK ON  
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is  
Clock display  
turned off.  
• CLOCK OFF : Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds  
when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK HOUR  
Hour adjustment  
1 – 12  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]  
CLOCK MIN  
00 – 59  
Minute adjustment  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
• ON  
• OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL *2  
Scroll  
• ONCE  
• AUTO  
• OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless  
of the setting.  
L/O MODE  
Line output mode  
• REAR  
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the  
speakers (through an external amplifier).  
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a  
subwoofer (through an external amplifier).  
• SUB.W  
SUB.W FREQ*3  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
• LOW  
• MID  
• HIGH  
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
TAG DISPLAY  
Tag display  
• TAG ON  
• TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].  
Cancels.  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select  
“CLCOK OFF” that you save the car’s battery.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”  
2
3
*
*
Continued on the next page  
13  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain  
control  
•
LOW POWER  
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the  
speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speaker.)  
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
• HIGH POWER  
:
:
AREA  
Tuner channel  
interval  
• AREA US  
When using in North/Central/South America. AM/FM intervals are set  
to 10 kHz/200 kHz.  
When using in any other areas. AM/FM intervals are set to 9 kHz/  
50 kHz (100 kHz during auto search).  
When using in South American countries. AM/FM intervals are set to  
10 kHz/100 kHz.  
• AREA EU  
:
:
• AREA SA  
Other external component operations  
You can connect an external component to the  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 11 and 12.)  
Portable audio player, etc  
3.5 mm (3/16”) stereo  
mini plug (not supplied)  
To check the other information while  
listening to an external component  
~
Clock Ô AUX IN  
• You can also select “AUX IN” as the playback  
source by pressing the SRC (source) button.  
14  
Title assignment  
More about this unit  
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and  
AM) and up to 8 characters for each station name.  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• By pressing SRC or AUX on the unit, you can also turn  
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also  
starts.  
1
2
Select FM/AM.  
Turning off the power  
Show the title entry screen.  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
3
Assign a title.  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
1
Select a character.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character  
position.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish  
entering the title.  
4
Finish the procedure.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA  
formats.  
To erase the entire title  
In step 2 above...  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
Continued on the next page  
15  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as  
those which are detected first if a disc includes both  
audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on  
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for  
the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
– Bit rate of WMA: 16 kbps — 32 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 22.05 kHz)  
32 kbps — 320 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 48 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 255  
folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
16  
• This unit may not recognized a USB device connected  
through a USB card reader.  
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB device  
• While playing from a USB device, the playback order  
may differ from other players.  
• This unit may not play back files in a USB device  
properly when using a USB extension cord.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some USB  
devices or some files due to their characteristics or  
recording conditions.  
• Depending on the shape of the USB devices and  
connection ports, some USB devices may not be  
attached properly or the connection might be loose.  
• Connect one USB mass storage class device to the unit  
at a time. Do not use a USB hub.  
• If the connected USB device does not have the correct  
files, “NO FILE” appears.  
Changing the source  
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
• If you change the source, playback also stops.  
Next time you select the same source again, playback  
starts from where it has been stopped previously.  
– Bit rate of MP3: 16 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency of MP3:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5)  
– Bit rate of WMA:  
16 kbps — 32 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 22.05 kHz)  
32 kbps — 320 kbps  
Ejecting a disc or removing a USB device  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust.  
• After ejecting a disc or removing a USB device,  
“NO DISC” or “NO USB“ appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,  
reattach a USB device, or press SRC to select another  
playback source.  
(Sampling frequency: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)  
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
General settings—PSM  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOLUME 30.”  
• The maximum number of characters for:  
– Folder names : 25 characters  
– File names : 25 characters  
– MP3 Tag : 128 characters  
– WMA Tag : 64 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files, 255  
folders (999 files per folder), and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit does not support SD card reader.  
• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating  
is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.  
• USB devices equipped with special functions such as  
data security functions cannot be used with the unit.  
• Do not use a USB device with 2 or more partitions.  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station  
frequencies, “NAMEFULL” appears. Delete unwanted  
titles before assignment.  
17  
To keep discs clean  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Connectors  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD  
—8 cm (3-3/16”) disc  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
Center holder  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Sticker and  
Stick-on label  
sticker residue  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
Unusual shape  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
18  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 3).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
•
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you  
used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and ”EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file  
names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
Continued on the next page  
19  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you  
have intended.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
album name).  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to  
another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or  
<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• “READING” keeps flashing on the display.  
• Readout time varies depending on the USB device.  
• Do not use too many hierarchy, folders, and empty  
folders*.  
• Turn off the power then on again.  
• Reattach the USB device again.  
* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains  
data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.  
• Tracks/folders are not played back in the  
order you have intended.  
The playback order is determined by the write-in time  
stamp. The first track/folder written into the USB device  
will be the first track/folder for playback.  
• “NO FILE” flashes on the display.  
• “NO USB” appears on the display.  
• The unit cannot detect the USB device.  
• Attach a USB device that contains tracks encoded in an  
appropriate format.  
• Reattach the USB device again.  
• “READ” and “FAILED” appear alternately on The total number of tracks could not be accessed properly.  
the display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.  
album name).  
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• While playing a track, sound is sometimes  
interrupted.  
The MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into  
the USB device.  
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB device, and try  
again.  
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
20  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
Power Output:  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
20 W RMS × 4 Channels at  
4 Ω and ≤ 1% THD+N  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Dynamic Range:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 Ω)  
96 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass/Mid-range/  
Treble:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Wow and Flutter:  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
Less than measurable limit  
12 dB at 60 Hz/1 kHz/10 kHz  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Line-Out Level/  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
Impedance:  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Subwoofer-Out Level/ 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Impedance:  
USB SECTION  
USB Standard:  
Data Transfer Rate  
(Full Speed):  
Storage:  
USB 1.1, USB 2.0  
Max. 12 Mbps  
Other Terminal:  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, USB  
input jack, Steering wheel  
remote input  
Less than 8 GB (1 partition type)  
Mass storage class (except HDD)  
Compatible Device:  
Compatible File System: FAT 32/16/12  
Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM: 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz  
(with channel interval set to 100 kHz or 200 kHz)  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
(with channel interval set to 50 kHz)  
AM: 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
Max. Current:  
500 mA  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V  
allowance)  
(with channel interval set to 10 kHz)  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
(with channel interval set to 9 kHz)  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature: (32°F to 104°F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
Negative ground  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity:  
Alternate Channel  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Installation Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
(7-3/16” × 2-1/16” × 6-5/16”)  
Panel Size:  
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm  
(7-7/16” × 2-5/16” × 1/4”)  
65 dB  
Mass:  
1.3 kg (2.9 lbs)  
(excluding accessories)  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation:  
AM Tuner  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
35 dB  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your telephone  
directory for the nearest car audio speciality shop.  
21  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Still having trouble??  
USA ONLY  
Call 1-800-252-5722  
http://www.jvc.com  
We can help you!  
EN, SP, FR  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1107DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-G440  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manual de instalación/conexión  
Manuel d’installation/raccordement  
1107DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, SP, FR  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0526-002A  
[J]  
ENGLISH  
ESPAÑOL  
FRANÇAIS  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground  
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a  
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio este sistema, será necesario un inversor de tensión, que puede ser  
dealers.  
Esta unidad está diseñada para funcionar con 12 V de CC, con  
sistemas eléctricos de masa NEGATIVA. Si su vehículo no posee  
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant  
continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce  
type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous  
pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
adquirido en los concesionarios de JVC de equipos de audio para  
automóviles.  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the  
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before  
installing the unit.  
ADVERTENCIAS  
AVERTISSEMENTS  
Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el terminal Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher  
negativo de la batería y que efectúe todas las conexiones eléctricas  
antes de instalar la unidad.  
la borne négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les raccordements  
électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after  
installation.  
• Asegúrese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis  
del automóvil después de la instalación.  
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de  
cet appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.  
Notes:  
Notas:  
Remarques:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows  
frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.  
• Reemplace el fusible por uno con la corriente especificada. Si el  
fusible se quemase frecuentemente consulte con su concesionario  
de JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.  
• Se recomienda conectar altavoces que tengan una potencia máxima  
de más de 50 W (tanto en las partes delantera como trasera, con una  
impedancia de 4 Ω á 8 Ω). Si la potencia máxima es de menos de 50  
W, cambie “AMP GAIN” para evitar daños en los altavoces (consulte  
la página 23 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).  
• Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los terminales de los conductores  
NO UTILIZADOS con cinta aislante.  
• El sumidero térmico estará muy caliente después del uso. Asegúrese  
de no tocarlo al desmontar esta unidad.  
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute  
souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance  
maximum de plus de 50 W (à l’arrière et à l’avant et avec une  
impédance de 4 Ω à 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est inférieure à  
50 W, changez “AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes  
(voir page 23 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).  
• Pour éviter les courts-circuits, recouvrez les extrémités des fils  
INUTILISÉS avec une bande isolante.  
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire  
attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.  
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power  
of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an  
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,  
change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being  
damaged (see page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads  
with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it  
when removing this unit.  
Heat sink / Sumidero térmico / Dissipateur de chaleur  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker  
connections:  
PRECAUCIONES sobre las conexiones de la  
fuente de alimentación y de los altavoces:  
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la  
connexion des enceintes:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • NO conecte los conductores de altavoz del cable de  
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon  
d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait  
sérieusement endommagé.  
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation  
aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.  
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the  
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.  
alimentación a la batería de automóvil, pues podrían  
producirse graves daños en la unidad.  
• ANTES de conectar a los altavoces los conductores de altavoz del  
cable de alimentación, verifique el conexionado de altavoz de su  
automóvil.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Con esta unidad se suministran las siguientes piezas. Si hay algún  
consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately.  
Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión  
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et  
raccordement  
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose  
elemento faltante, consulte inmediatamente con su concesionario de  
JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.  
manquait, consultez votre revendeur autoradio JVC immédiatement.  
A / B  
E
C
D
Hard case/Control panel  
Estuche duro/Panel de control  
Etui de transport/Panneau de commande  
Power cord  
Cordón de alimentación  
Cordon d’alimentation  
Sleeve  
Cubierta  
Manchon  
Trim plate  
Placa de guarnición  
Plaque d’assemblage  
H
F
G
Mounting bolt—M4 × 5 mm (M4 × 1/4"); M5 × 12.5 mm (M5 × 1/2")  
Perno de montaje—M4 × 5 mm (M4 × 1/4 pulgada); M5 × 12.5 mm (M5 × 1/2 pulgada)  
Boulon de montage—M4 × 5 mm (M4 × 1/4 pouces); M5 × 12.5 mm (M5 × 1/2 pouces)  
Washer (ø5)  
Arandela (ø5)  
Rondelle (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Tuerca de seguridad (M5)  
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)  
I
J
K
L
Rubber cushion  
Cojín de goma  
Amortisseur en caoutchouc  
Handles  
Manijas  
Poignées  
Remote controller  
Control remoto  
Télécommande  
Battery  
Pila  
Pile  
1
INSTALLATION  
INSTALACION (MONTAJE EN EL  
TABLERO DE INSTRUMENTOS)  
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE  
DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)  
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Si tiene alguna  
questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult  
your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si  
vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des kits  
pregunta o necesita información acerca de las herramientas para  
instalación, consulte con su concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed para automóviles o a una compañía que suministra tales herramientas. compagnie d’approvisionnement.  
by a qualified technician.  
• Si usted no está seguro de cómo instalar correctamente la unidad,  
hágala instalar por un técnico cualificado.  
• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le  
faire installer par un technicien qualifié.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Realice las conexiones eléctricas requeridas.  
Réalisez les connexions électriques.  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Doble las lengüetas apropiadas para  
retener firmemente la manga en su lugar.  
Tordez les languettes appropriées pour  
maintenir le manchon en place.  
Removing the unit  
Extracción de la unidad  
Retrait de l’appareil  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Antes de extraer la unidad, libere la sección trasera.  
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Inserte las dos manijas y, a continuación,  
extráigalas de la manera indicada en la ilustración  
para poder desmontar la unidad.  
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon  
illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.  
When using the optional stay / Cuando emplea un  
soporte opcional / Lors de l’utilisation du hauban en  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Instalación de la unidad sin utilizar  
la cubierta / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil scans utiliser de manchon  
option  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
En un automóvil Toyota, por ejemplo, en primer lugar desmonte el autorradio e instale la unidad en su lugar.  
Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.  
Stay (option)  
Soporte (opción)  
Hauban (en option)  
Fire wall  
Flat head screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*2  
Tornillos de cabeza plana—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*2  
Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pouces)*2  
Tabique a prueba de incendios  
Cloison  
Dashboard  
Tablero de instrumentos  
Tableau de bord  
Bracket*2  
Ménsula*2  
Support*2  
Flat head screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*2  
Screw (option)  
Tornillo (opción)  
Vis (en option)  
Tornillos de cabeza plana—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*2  
Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pouces)*2  
Pocket  
Compartimiento  
Poche  
Bracket*2  
Ménsula*2  
Support*2  
Note  
Nota  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm (3/8") -long screws. If longer  
screws are used, they could damage the unit.  
: Cuando instala la unidad en la ménsula de montaje, asegúrese de utilizar los tornillos de 8 mm (3/8 pulgada) de  
longitud. Si se utilizan tornillos más largos, éstos pueden dañar la unidad.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Instale la unidad a un ángulo de menos de 30˚.  
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30˚.  
Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm  
(3/8 pouces). Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.  
1
2
1
2
1
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the  
rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
Al poner la unidad vertical, tenga cuidado de no dañar el fusible  
provisto en la parte posterior.  
No suministrado con esta unidad.  
*
Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas  
endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.  
Non fourni avec cet appareil.  
2
*
*
*
2
ENGLISH  
ESPAÑOL  
FRANÇAIS  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS  
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES  
A
Typical connections / Conexiones tipicas / Raccordements typiques  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.  
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car unidad.  
Antes de la conexión: Verifique atentamente el conexionado del  
vehículo. Una conexión incorrecta podría producir daños graves en la câblage du véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager  
sérieusement l’appareil.  
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le  
body may be different in color.  
Los cordones del cable de alimentación y los del conector procedentes Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de  
de la carrocería del automóvil podrían ser de diferentes en color.  
la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order  
1 Conecte los conductores de color del cable de alimentación en el  
1 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre  
specified in the illustration below.  
orden especificado en la ilustración de abajo.  
spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
2 Conecte el cable de antena.  
2 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3 Por último, conecte el cable de alimentación a la unidad.  
3 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.  
Line out (see diagram  
Salida de línea (véase diagrama  
)
Rear ground terminal  
Terminal de tierra posterior  
)
Sortie de ligne (voir le diagramme  
)
Borne arrière de masse  
Antenna terminal  
Terminal de la antena  
Borne de l’antenne  
15 A fuse  
Fusible de 15 A  
Fusible 15 A  
OE  
Steering wheel remote input  
(see diagram  
)
Entrada del control remoto del  
volante de dirección  
Ignition switch  
Interruptor de encendido  
Interrupteur d’allumage  
(véase diagrama  
)
Black  
Negro  
Noir  
Entrée de la télécommande de volant  
(voir le diagramme  
)
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil  
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture  
Yellow*2  
Amarillo*2  
Jaune*2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del  
automóvil (desviando el interruptor de encendido) (12 V constantes)  
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la  
voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)  
Red  
Rojo  
Fuse block  
Bloque de fusibles  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
A un terminal accesorio del bloque de fusibles  
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible  
Rouge  
Porte-fusible  
Blue with white stripe  
Azul con rayas blancas  
Bleu avec bande blanche  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
(200 mA max.)  
Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere  
(máx. 200 mA)  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y  
en a une (200 mA max.)  
White with black stripe  
Blanco con rayas negras  
Blanc avec bande noire  
White  
Blanco  
Blanc  
Gray with black stripe  
Gris con rayas negras  
Gris avec bande noire  
Gray  
Gris  
Gris  
Green with black stripe  
Verde con rayas negras  
Vert avec bande noire  
Green  
Verde  
Vert  
Purple with black stripe  
Púrpura con rayas negras  
Violet avec bande noire  
Purple  
Púrpura  
Violet  
Left speaker (front)  
Altavoz izquierdo (frontal)  
Right speaker (front)  
Altavoz derecho (frontal)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Altavoz izquierdo (trasero)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Altavoz derecho (trasero)  
Enceinte gauche (avant)  
Enceinte droit (avant)  
Enceinte gauche (arrière)  
Enceinte droit (arrière)  
Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Conexión al control remoto del volante de dirección / Connexion de la télécommande  
de volant  
B
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller,  
Si votre voiture est équipée d’une télécommande de volant, vous  
pouvez commander cet autoradio en utilisant cette télécommande.  
Pour la connexion, vous avez besoin d’un adaptateur de  
télécommande spécialisé (non fourni) correspondant à votre voiture.  
Pour en savoir plus, consultez le revendeur autoradio où vous avez  
acheté votre autoradio.  
Si su automóvil está equipado con control remoto en el volante de  
dirección, podrá controlar este receptor utilizando el control remoto.  
Para la conexión, se requiere un adaptador remoto exclusivo (no  
suministrado) que sea adecuado para su automóvil. Para los detalles,  
consulte con el concesionario car audio donde compró el receptor.  
you can operate this unit using the controller. For connection, an  
exclusive remote adapter (not supplied) which matches your car is  
required. For details, consult the same car audio dealer as where the  
unit is purchased.  
Remote adapter*1  
Adaptador para remoto exclusivo*1  
Adaptateur pour télécommande spécialisé*1  
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)  
Control remoto del volante de dirección (equipado en el vehículo)  
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)  
OE  
Steering wheel remote input  
Entrada del control remoto del volante de dirección  
Entrée de la télécommande de volant  
1
2
1
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this  
lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot be turned on.  
*
*
No suministrado con esta unidad.  
*
*
Non fourni avec cet appareil.  
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil  
doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut pas être mis sous tension.  
2
2
Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta unidad previa a de  
la instalación, es necesario conectar este cable, de lo contrario no se  
podrá conectar la alimentación.  
3
C
Connecting the external amplifiers or subwoofer / Conexión de los amplificadores o subwoofer externos / Connexion d’amplificateurs  
extérieurs ou d’un caisson de grave  
Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour améliorer votre système  
autoradio.  
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)  
au fil de commande à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il  
puisse être commandé via cet appareil.  
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote  
lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through  
this unit.  
Usted podrá conectar un amplificador para mejorar el sistema estéreo  
de su automóvil.  
•
Conecte el conductor remoto (azul con rayas blancas) al conductor  
remoto del otro equipo para poderlo controlar a través de esta unidad.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the • Desconecte los altavoces de esta unidad y conéctelos al  
• Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les  
à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de cet appareil  
inutilisés.  
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.  
amplificador. Los cables de los altavoces de esta unidad  
quedan sin usar.  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Conector en Y (no suministrado con esta unidad)  
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)  
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR”  
(See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Ajuste “L/O MODE” a “REAR”  
(Consulte la página 13 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.)  
Réglez “L/O MODE” sur “REAR”  
(Voir page 13 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Cable remoto (azul con rayas blancas)  
Fil d’alimentation à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)  
To the remote lead of other  
equipment or automatic antenna  
if any  
Al conductor remoto de  
otro equipo o de la antena  
automática, si hubiere  
JVC Amplifier  
Amplificador de JVC  
JVC Amplificateur  
Rear speakers  
Altavoces posteriores  
Enceintes arrière  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
Cable de señal (no suministrado con esta  
unidad)  
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet  
appareil)  
Au fil de télécommande de  
l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne  
automatique s’il y en a une  
Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W”  
Front speakers  
Altavoces delanteros  
(See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Ajuste “L/O MODE” a “SUB.W”  
Enceintes avant  
(Consulte la página 13 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.)  
Réglez “L/O MODE” sur “SUB.W”  
(Voir page 13 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Subwoofer  
Subwoofer  
Caisson de grave  
JVC Amplifier  
Amplificador de JVC  
JVC Amplificateur  
or / o / ou  
3
3
4
3
*
*
Fil d’alimentation à distance  
*
*
Remote lead  
*
*
Cable remoto  
4
4
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de  
la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est  
recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil).  
L’appareil peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.  
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of  
the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove  
the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage  
to the unit.  
Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocería metálica o al chasis—a  
un lugar no cubierto con pintura (si está cubierto con pintura, quítela  
antes de fijar el cable). De lo contrario, se podrían producir daños en la  
unidad.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS  
• El fusible se quema.  
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES  
• Le fusible saute.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados?  
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• No es posible conectar la alimentación.  
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* ¿Está el cable amarillo conectado?  
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• No sale sonido de los altavoces.  
• Pas de son des enceintes.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• El sonido presenta distorsión.  
• Le son est déformé.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?  
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una  
masa común?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble  
à la masse?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using  
shorter and thicker cords?  
• Perturbación de ruido.  
* ¿El terminal de tierra trasero está conectado al chasis del automóvil  
utilizando los cordones más corto y más grueso?  
• Interférence avec les sons.  
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la  
voiture avec un cordon court et épais?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• Esta unidad se calienta.  
• Cet appareil devient chaud.  
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?  
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una  
masa común?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble  
à la masse?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Esta unidad no funciona en absoluto.  
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.  
* ¿Reinicializó la unidad?  
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?  
4
CD RECEIVER  
RÉCEPTEUR CD  
KD-G441/KD-G351  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 5.  
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 5.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0500-003A  
[EX/EU]  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
Note: Only for [EX] model users in UK and  
European countries  
For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided  
This symbol is only valid in  
the European Union.  
with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on  
the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will  
help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.  
Information for Users on Disposal of Old  
Equipment  
This symbol indicates that the product with  
For safety...  
this symbol should not be disposed as general  
household waste at its end-of-life. If you wish to  
dispose of this product, please do so in accordance  
with applicable national legislation or other rules in  
your country and municipality. By disposing of this  
product correctly, you will help to conserve natural  
resources and will help prevent potential negative  
effects on the environment and human health.  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
Warning:  
The control panel illustrations used for explanation  
in this manual is of KD-G441.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
2
How to reset your unit  
CONTENTS  
Control panel — KD-G441/KD-G351........ 4  
Getting started................................. 5  
Basic operations....................................................  
5
Radio operations .............................. 6  
FM RDS operations............................ 7  
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme ...  
7
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Disc/USB device operations ............... 10  
Playing a disc in the unit ...................................... 10  
Playing from a USB device..................................... 10  
Sound adjustments........................... 13  
General settings — PSM ................... 14  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
Other external component  
operations .................................... 16  
How to use the M MODE button  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons will work  
as different function buttons.  
Remote controller — RM-RK50 ......... 17  
More about this unit ......................... 18  
Maintenance .................................... 21  
Troubleshooting............................... 22  
Specifications................................... 24  
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Detaching the control panel  
To use these buttons for their original functions,  
press M MODE again.  
• Waiting for about 5 seconds without pressing any of  
these buttons will automatically cancels the functions  
mode.  
KD-G441 is equipped with the steering wheel  
remote control function.  
• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate  
volume) for connection.  
Attaching the control panel  
3
Control panel —  
KD-G441/KD-G351  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons  
2 0 (eject) button  
o
;
a
s
d
f
g
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
Number buttons  
RPT (repeat) button  
RND (random) button  
3
4
5
(standby/on attenuator) button  
Control dial  
Remote sensor  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
• For KD-G441: You can control this unit with an  
optionally purchased remote controller. For  
details, see page 17.  
USB (Universal Serial Bus) input jack  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Time countdown indicator  
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
BAND button  
Loading slot  
Display window  
T/P (traffic programme/programme type) button  
DISP (display) button  
(control panel release) button  
SRC (source) button  
h
j
k
Tr (track) indicator  
RDS indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer) indicators  
—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ, ROCK, POPS, USER  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
l
/
z
x
c
e 4 /¢ buttons  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
r
t
y
u
i
AUX (auxiliary) button  
SEL (select) button  
M MODE button  
EQ (equalizer) button  
MO (monaural) button  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (folder), (track/file)  
DISC indicator  
v
b
Main display  
4
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
Getting started  
To restore the sound, press the  
button again.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
To turn off the power  
Ÿ
Basic settings  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages  
14 – 16.  
* You cannot select these sources if they are not  
ready or not connected.  
1
2
! For FM/AM tuner  
⁄ Adjust the volume.  
1
2
Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK HOUR”, then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK MIN” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
Select “24H/12H,” then “24 HOUR” or  
“12 HOUR”.  
Volume level appears.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
3
Finish the procedure.  
page 13.)  
Caution on volume setting:  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Digital devices (CD/USB) produce very little noise  
compared with other sources. Lower the volume  
before playing these digital sources to avoid  
damaging the speakers by sudden increase of the  
output level.  
Clock time is shown on the display for  
about 5 seconds. See also page 14.  
5
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Ÿ
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
! Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
To tune in to a station manually  
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
In step ! above...  
1
2
3
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
6
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.50MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
FM RDS operations  
What you can do with RDS  
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to send an  
additional signal along with their regular programme  
signals.  
1
2
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the  
following:  
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)  
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby  
Receptions (see pages 8, 9, and 15)  
3
• Tracing the same programme automatically  
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 9)  
• Programme Search (see pages 9 and 15)  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Searching for your favorite  
FM RDS programme  
Listening to a preset station  
1
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite  
programme by searching for a PTY code.  
• To store your favorite programme types, see page 8.  
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
~
The last selected PTY code  
appears.  
or  
Ÿ Select one of your favorite programme  
types.  
To check the other information while  
or  
listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station  
• For FM RDS stations, see page 9.  
Select one of the PTY codes (see  
page 9).  
Frequency Ô Clock  
Continued on the next page  
7
! Start searching for your favorite  
Using the standby receptions  
TA Standby Reception  
programme.  
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any  
source other than AM.  
If there is a station broadcasting a programme  
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that  
station is tuned in.  
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the  
current level is lower than the preset level (see  
page 15).  
To activate TA Standby Reception  
Storing your favorite programme  
types  
The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator  
either lights up or flashes.  
You can store six favorite programme types.  
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is  
activated.  
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is  
not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening  
to an FM station without the RDS signals required for  
TA Standby Reception.)  
Preset programme types in the number buttons  
(1 to 6):  
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another  
station providing these signals. The TP indicator will  
stop flashing and remain lit.  
1
2
Select a PTY code (see pages 7 and 8).  
Select the preset number (1 – 6) you want to  
store into.  
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception  
The TP indicator goes off.  
PTY Standby Reception  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any  
source other than AM.  
Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected  
3
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY codes  
into other preset numbers.  
To activate and select your favorite PTY code for  
PTY Standby Reception, see page 15.  
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.  
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception  
is activated.  
Finish the procedure.  
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is  
not yet activated.  
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to another  
station providing these signals. The PTY indicator will  
stop flashing and remain lit.  
8
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select  
“OFF” for the PTY code (see page 15). The PTY indicator  
goes off.  
Automatic station selection—  
Programme Search  
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset  
station is tuned in.  
Tracing the same programme—  
Network-Tracking Reception  
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not  
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF  
data, tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the  
same programme as the original preset station is  
broadcasting.  
When driving in an area where FM reception is not  
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to  
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly  
broadcasting the same programme with stronger  
signals (see the illustration below).  
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another  
station using programme search.  
• See also page 15.  
When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking  
Reception is activated.  
To change the Network-Tracking Reception  
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 15.  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM RDS station  
Station name (PS) = Station  
Frequency = Programme type  
(PTY) = Clock = (back to the  
beginning)  
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas  
(01 – 05)  
PTY codes  
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,  
SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY  
M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),  
WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE  
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),  
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT  
9
Ÿ
Disc / USB device  
operations  
: For built-in CD player operations.  
: For external USB device operations.  
USB memory  
If a USB device has been attached...  
Playing a disc in the unit  
Playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• If a different USB device is currently attached,  
playback starts from the beginning.  
To detach the USB device, straightly pull it out from  
the unit.  
• Removing the USB device will also stop playback.  
Then, press SRC to listen to another playback source.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the  
source or eject the disc.  
Cautions:  
To stop play and eject the disc  
• Avoid using the USB device if it might hinder your  
safety driving.  
• Do not pull out or attach the USB device  
repeatedly while “READING” appears on the  
display.  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
Playing from a USB device  
• Do not start a car engine if a USB device is  
connected.  
• This unit may not be able to play the files  
depending on the type of the USB device.  
• Operation and power supply may not work as  
intended for some USB devices.  
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB  
device (except HDD).  
All tracks in the USB device will be played repeatedly  
until you change the source.  
• You cannot connect a computer to the USB input  
jack of the unit.  
• Make sure all important data has been backed up  
to avoid losing the data.  
USB input jack  
~
• Do not leave a USB device in the car, expose to  
direct sunlight, or high temperature to avoid  
deformation or cause damage to the USB device.  
• Some USB devices may not work immediately  
after you turn on the power.  
• For more details about USB operations, see pages  
19 and 20.  
10  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous track  
Other main functions  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3/WMA, you can skip tracks within the same  
folder.  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
To go to the next or previous folder (for  
MP3/WMA)  
1
2
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA) directly  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
3
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA, it is  
required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3/WMA):  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
11  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or CD Text  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
1
A = B = Disc title/performer*1 = Track  
title* 1 [ ] = (back to the beginning)  
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
While playing an MP3/WMA disc or  
USB device  
• When “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 16)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
The current track. [  
TRACK RPT  
:
]
FOLDER RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.  
[
]
RPT OFF  
:
Cancels.  
A = B = Album name/performer (folder  
name*2) [  
] = Track title (file  
7
Random play  
name*2) [  
] = (back to the beginning)  
Mode  
Plays at random  
• When “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF”  
FOLDER RND * : All tracks of the current folder,  
then the tracks of the next folder  
A = B = Folder name [ ] = File name  
and so on. [  
All tracks of the current disc or  
]
[
] = (back to the beginning)  
ALL RND  
RND OFF  
:
:
USB device. [  
Cancels.  
]
A
B
:
:
The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
Clock with the current track number  
*
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/USB).  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the  
display  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
2
12  
Indication, [Range]  
Sound adjustments  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
BASS *2, [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
MIDDLE *2 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
1
2
TREBLE *2, [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
FADER *3, [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
Preset values  
BAS MID TRE LOUD  
Indication (For)  
BALANCE *4, [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
USER  
(Flat sound)  
00  
00 00 OFF  
LOUD *5 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
+03 00 +02 OFF  
+01 00 +03 OFF  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 OFF  
+03 00 +03 OFF  
SUB.W*1, [00 to 08, initial: 04]  
Adjust the subwoofer output level.  
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
POPS  
(Light music)  
VOL ADJ (volume adjust), [–05 to +05, initial: 00]  
Adjust the volume level of each source (except FM), in  
relation to the FM volume level. The volume level will  
automatically increase or decrease when you change  
the source.  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
• Before making an adjustment, select the source you  
want to adjust.  
BAS: Bass MID: Mid-range TRE: Treble LOUD: Loudness  
VOLUME, [00 to 50 or 00 to 30] *6  
Adjust the volume.  
1
*
*
For KD-G441: Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set  
to “SUB.W” (see page 15).  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
2
3
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the  
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently  
selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.  
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be  
applied to all sound modes.  
1
*
4
5
*
*
2
6
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 16 for details.)  
13  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table below and on pages 15 and 16.  
1
2
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
Select a PSM item.  
5
Finish the procedure.  
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
DEMO  
Display demonstration  
• DEMO ON  
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [5].  
Cancels.  
• DEMO OFF  
:
:
CLOCK DISP *1  
Clock display  
• CLOCK ON  
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the  
power is turned off.  
• CLOCK OFF  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about  
5 seconds when the power is turned off, [5].  
CLOCK HOUR  
0 – 23 (1 – 12) [Initial: 0 (0:00)], [5].  
Hour adjustment  
CLOCK MIN  
00 – 59  
[Initial: 00 (0:00)], [5].  
Minute adjustment  
24H/12H  
• 24 HOUR  
:
See also page 5 for setting.  
Time display mode  
• 12 HOUR  
CLOCK ADJ *2  
Clock adjustment  
• AUTO  
:
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock  
time) data in the RDS signal.  
Cancels.  
• OFF  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select  
“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.  
14  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
AF-REG *2  
Alternative  
frequency/  
regionalization  
reception  
• AF  
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit  
switches to another station (the programme may differ from the  
one currently received), [9].  
• The AF indicator lights up.  
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit  
switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.  
• The AF and REG indicators light up.  
• AF-REG  
Cancels.  
• AF OFF  
PTY-STANDBY *2  
OFF, PTY codes Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [8, 9].  
PTY standby  
TA VOLUME *2  
Traffic  
announcement  
volume  
VOLUME 00  
[Initial: VOLUME 15]  
– VOLUME 50  
(or VOLUME 00  
– VOLUME 30)*3  
P-SEARCH *2  
Programme search • OFF  
• ON  
:
:
Activates Programme Search, [9].  
Cancels.  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
• ON  
• OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
TEL MUTING  
Telephone muting  
• MUTING 1/  
MUTING 2  
• MUTING OFF  
:
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular  
phone.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL *4  
Scroll  
• ONCE  
• AUTO  
• OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
L/O MODE *5  
Line output mode  
• REAR  
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the  
speakers (through an external amplifier).  
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a  
subwoofer (through an external amplifier).  
• SUB.W  
2
*
*
*
*
Only for FM RDS stations.  
Depends on the amplifier gain control.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
For KD-G441.  
3
4
5
Continued on the next page  
15  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
SUB.W FREQ*6  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
• LOW  
• MID  
• HIGH  
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
TAG DISPLAY  
Tag display  
• TAG ON  
• TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [12].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
• LOW POWER  
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the  
speaker is less than 50 W to avoid them from damaging the speaker.)  
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
• HIGH POWER  
:
:
IF BAND  
Intermediate  
frequency band  
• AUTO  
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noise between  
close stations. (The stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to the interference noise from adjacent stations, but the  
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.  
• WIDE  
:
6
*
For KD-G441: Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”  
Other external component operations  
You can connect an external component to the  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
Portable audio player, etc  
page 13.)  
3.5 mm stereo mini  
plug (not supplied)  
To check the other information while  
listening to an external component  
~
AUX IN Ô Clock  
• You can also select “AUX IN” as the playback  
source by pressing the SRC (source) button.  
16  
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
KD-G441 can be remotely controlled as instructed here  
(with an optionally purchased remote controller). We  
recommend that you use remote controller RM-RK50  
with your unit.  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.  
Warning:  
3
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or  
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as the dashboard) exposed to direct  
sunlight for a long time; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid the risk of accidents.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
4
5
SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
17  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
More about this unit  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• By pressing SRC or AUX on the unit, you can also turn  
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also  
starts.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA  
formats.  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as  
those which are detected first if a disc includes both  
audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on  
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for  
the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
FM RDS operations  
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of  
RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF  
(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without  
receiving these data correctly, Network-Tracking  
Reception will not operate correctly.  
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby  
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to  
the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower  
than the preset level.  
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated  
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is  
also activated automatically.  
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit  
<http://www.rds.org.uk>.  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
18  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 255  
folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB device  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
• While playing from a USB device, the playback order  
may differ from other players.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some USB  
devices or some files due to their characteristics or  
recording conditions.  
• Depending on the shape of the USB devices and  
connection ports, some USB devices may not be  
attached properly or the connection might be loose.  
• Connect one USB mass storage class device to the unit  
at a time. Do not use a USB hub.  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
– Bit rate of WMA: 16 kbps — 32 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 22.05 kHz)  
32 kbps — 320 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 48 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)  
• If the connected USB device does not have the correct  
files, “NO FILE” appears.  
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
Continued on the next page  
19  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate of MP3: 16 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency of MP3:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5)  
– Bit rate of WMA:  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops.  
Next time you select the same source again, playback  
starts from where it has been stopped previously.  
Ejecting a disc or removing a USB device  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust.  
• After ejecting a disc or removing a USB device,  
“NO DISC” or “NO USB“ appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,  
reattach a USB device, or press SRC to select another  
playback source.  
16 kbps — 32 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 22.05 kHz)  
32 kbps — 320 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)  
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
• The maximum number of characters for:  
– Folder names : 25 characters  
General settings—PSM  
– File names : 25 characters  
– MP3 Tag : 128 characters  
– WMA Tag : 64 characters  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOLUME 30.”  
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files, 255  
folders (999 files per folder), and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit does not support SD card reader.  
• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating  
is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.  
• USB devices equipped with special functions such as  
data security functions cannot be used with the unit.  
• Do not use a USB device with 2 or more partitions.  
• This unit may not recognize a USB device connected  
through a USB card reader.  
• This unit may not play back files in a USB device  
properly when using a USB extension cord.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
• Use a shielded USB cable of less than 1 m in length.  
20  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
To keep discs clean  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
Connectors  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Center holder  
Sticker and  
sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
Unusual shape  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
21  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 3).  
Store stations manually.  
Connect the aerial firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which  
you used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 11).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and ”EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file  
names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
22  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you  
have intended.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
album name).  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to  
another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or  
<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• “READING” keeps flashing on the display.  
• Readout time varies depending on the USB device.  
• Do not use too many hierarchy, folders, and empty  
folders*.  
• Turn off the power then on again.  
• Reattach the USB device again.  
* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains  
data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.  
• Tracks/folders are not played back in the  
order you have intended.  
The playback order is determined by the write-in time  
stamp. The first track/folder written into the USB device  
will be the first track/folder for playback.  
• “NO FILE” flashes on the display.  
• “NO USB” appears on the display.  
• The unit cannot detect the USB device.  
• Attach a USB device that contains tracks encoded in an  
appropriate format.  
• Reattach the USB device again.  
• “READ” and “FAILED” appear alternately on The total number of tracks could not be accessed properly.  
the display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.  
album name).  
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• While playing a track, sound is sometimes  
interrupted.  
The MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into  
the USB device.  
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB device, and try  
again.  
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
23  
Specifications  
Maximum Power  
Output:  
Front/Rear:  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Continuous Power  
Output (RMS):  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to  
20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total  
harmonic distortion  
Load Impedance:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
Tone Control Range: Bass:  
Middle:  
Treble:  
12 dB at 1 kHz  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
Frequency Response:  
Signal to Noise Ratio:  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
70 dB  
Audio Output Level: Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
1 kΩ  
(for KD-G441)  
Output Impedance:  
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:  
Other Terminals:  
2.5 V /20 kΩ load (full scale)  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, USB input  
jack, Steering wheel remote input (for  
KD-G441)  
Frequency Range:  
FM Tuner:  
FM:  
AM:  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz  
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz  
Usable Sensitivity:  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response:  
Stereo Separation:  
Sensitivity/Selectivity:  
Sensitivity:  
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
30 dB  
MW Tuner:  
LW Tuner:  
20 μV/35 dB  
50 μV  
24  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)  
Number of Channels:  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Wow and Flutter:  
98 dB  
Less than measurable limit  
320 kbps  
MP3 Decoding Format:  
(MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
Max. Bit Rate:  
WMA (Windows Media® Max. Bit Rate:  
Audio) Decoding Format:  
320 kbps  
USB Standard:  
USB 1.1, USB 2.0  
Max. 12 Mbps  
Data Transfer Rate (Full Speed):  
Storage:  
Less than 8 GB (1 partition type)  
Mass storage class (except HDD)  
FAT 32/16/12  
Compatible Device:  
Compatible File System:  
Playable Audio Format:  
Max. Current:  
MP3/WMA  
500 mA  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
Dimensions (W × H × D): Installation Size (approx.):  
Panel Size (approx.):  
0°C to +40°C  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
188 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
Mass (approx.):  
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
25  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?  
Réinitialisez votre appareil  
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil  
Dear Customer,  
Cher(e) client(e),  
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European  
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic  
compatibility and electrical safety.  
Cet appareil est conforme aux directives et normes  
européennes en vigueur concernant la compatibilité  
électromagnétique et à la sécurité électrique.  
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
is:  
Représentant européen de la société Victor Company of Japan,  
Limited:  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
Allemagne  
Germany  
EN, FR  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1107DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-G441/KD-G351  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manuel d’installation/raccordement  
1107DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, FR  
GET0500-010A  
[EX/EU]  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ENGLISH  
FRANÇAIS  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle  
does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.  
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE.  
Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez  
acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
WARNINGS  
AVERTISSEMENTS  
Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et  
d’effectuer tous les raccordements électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.  
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis de la  
voiture après l’installation.  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
Notes:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and  
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP  
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 16 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Remarques:  
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur  
d’autoradios JVC.  
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance maximum de plus de 50 W (à l’arrière et  
à l’avant et avec une impédance de 4 Ω à 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est inférieure à 50 W, changez  
“AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 16 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).  
• Pour éviter les courts-circuits, recouvrez les extrémités des fils INUTILISÉS avec une bande isolante.  
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant  
cet appareil.  
Heat sink  
Dissipateur de chaleur  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des enceintes:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon,  
will be seriously damaged.  
l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des  
enceintes de votre voiture.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.  
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur  
autoradio JVC immédiatement.  
A / B  
C
D
Hard case (only for KD-G441)/  
Control panel  
Sleeve  
Manchon  
Trim plate  
Plaque d’assemblage  
Etui de transport (uniquement pour  
le KD-G441)/Panneau de commande  
E
F
G
Power cord  
Cordon d’alimentation  
Washer (ø5)  
Rondelle (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)  
H
Mounting bolt  
I
J
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
Boulon de montage  
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
Rubber cushion  
Amortisseur en caoutchouc  
Handles  
Poignées  
1
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)  
L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin  
d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie  
d’approvisionnement.  
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying  
kits.  
• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par un technicien  
qualifié.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Réalisez les connexions électriques.  
For KD-G441  
Pour les disques  
KD-G441  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Tordez les languettes appropriées pour  
maintenir le manchon en place.  
Removing the unit  
Retrait de l’appareil  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon  
illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.  
When using the optional stay / Lors de l’utilisation du  
hauban en option  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil  
scans utiliser de manchon  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Stay (option)  
Fire wall  
Hauban (en option)  
Cloison  
Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Dashboard  
Tableau de bord  
Bracket*2  
Support*2  
Screw (option)  
Vis (en option)  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Pocket  
Poche  
Bracket*2  
Support*2  
Install the unit at an angle of less than  
30˚.  
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de  
moins de 30˚.  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws  
are used, they could damage the unit.  
Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de  
8 mm. Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.  
1
1
*
*
Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.  
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.  
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
2
2
TROUBLESHOOTING  
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES  
• The fuse blows.  
• Le fusible saute.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• Pas de son des enceintes.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Le son est déformé.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
• Interférence avec les sons.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un cordon court et épais?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
• L’appareil devient chaud.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?  
2
ENGLISH  
FRANÇAIS  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES  
If your car is equipped with the ISO  
connector / Si votre voiture est équippée  
d’un connecteur ISO  
For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobiles / Pour certaines automobiles VW/Audi ou  
Opel (Vauxhall)  
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.  
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.  
Vous aurrez peut-être besoin de modifier le câblage du cordon d’alimentation fourni comme montré sur l’illustration.  
• Contactez votre revendeur automobile autorisé avant d’installer l’appareil.  
A
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.  
• Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montré sur l’illustration.  
Original wiring / Câblage original  
Modified wiring 1 / Câblage modifié 1  
From the car body  
De la carrosserie de la  
voiture  
A
C
B
D
E
F
ISO connector  
Connecteur ISO  
G
H
Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.  
Utilisez le câblage modifié 2 si l’appareil ne se met pas sous tension.  
ISO connector of the supplied power cord  
Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d’alimentation  
fourni  
I
J
L
K
M
O
N
P
Modified wiring 2 / Câblage modifié 2  
Y: Yellow  
Jaune  
R: Red  
Rouge  
View from the lead side  
Vue à partir du côté des fils  
Connections without using the ISO connector / Connexions sans utiliser le connecteur ISO  
B
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion  
incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent être différents en  
couleur.  
1 Cut the ISO connector.  
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
3 Connect the aerial cord.  
1 Coupez le connecteur ISO.  
2
Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.  
3 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.  
4 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.  
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
Line out (see diagram )—only for KD-G441  
Sortie de ligne (voir le diagramme )—uniquement pour le KD-G441  
Rear ground terminal  
Borne arrière de masse  
Aerial terminal  
Borne de l’antenne  
15 A fuse  
Fusible 15 A  
OE  
Steering wheel remote input  
(see diagram )—only for  
KD-G441  
Entrée de la télécommande  
de volant (voir le diagramme  
)—uniquement pour le  
KD-G441  
Ignition switch  
Interrupteur  
d’allumage  
Black  
Noir  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture  
Yellow *2  
Jaune *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing  
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
À une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture  
(en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)  
Red  
Rouge  
Fuse block  
Porte-fusible  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible  
Blue with white stripe  
Bleu avec bande blanche  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any  
(200 mA max.)  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne  
automatique s’il y en a une (200 mA max.)  
Brown  
Marron  
To cellular phone system  
À un système de téléphone cellulaire  
White with black stripe  
Blanc avec bande noire  
White  
Blanc  
Gray with black stripe  
Gris avec bande noire  
Gray  
Gris  
Green with black stripe  
Vert avec bande noire  
Green  
Vert  
Purple with black stripe  
Violet avec bande noire  
Purple  
Violet  
Left speaker (front)  
Enceinte gauche (avant)  
Right speaker (front)  
Enceinte droit (avant)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Enceinte gauche (arrière)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Enceinte droit (arrière)  
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.  
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut  
pas être mis sous tension.  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the  
power cannot be turned on.  
3
Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller (only for KD-G441) / Connexion de la télécommande de volant (uniquement pour le  
KD-G441)  
C
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the  
Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande de volant, vous pouvez commander cet autoradio en  
controller. To do it, a JVC’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required. utilisant la télécommande. Pour le faire, un adaptateur pour télécommande au volant JVC (non fourni)  
Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.  
correspondant à votre voiture est nécessaire. Consultez votre revendeur d’autoradio JVC pour les détails.  
OE remote adapter (not supplied)  
Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni)  
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)  
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)  
OE  
Steering wheel remote input  
Entrée de la télécommande de volant  
D Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer (only for KD-G441) / Connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur ou d’un caisson de grave  
(uniquement pour le KD-G441)  
Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour améliorer votre système autoradio.  
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande à distance de  
l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse être commandé via cet appareil.  
• Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils  
d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.  
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet autoradio)  
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR”  
(See page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Réglez “L/O MODE” sur “REAR”  
(Voir page 15 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Fil d’alimentation à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)  
To the remote lead of other  
equipment or power aerial if any  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre  
appareil ou à l’antenne automatique  
s’il y en a une  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Amplificateur  
Rear speakers  
Enceintes arrière  
Signal cord (not supplied for  
this unit)  
Cordon de signal (non fourni  
avec cet autoradio)  
Rear speakers  
Enceintes arrière  
Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W”  
(See page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Réglez “L/O MODE” sur “SUB.W”  
Front speakers (see diagram  
Enceintes avant (voir le diagramme  
)
)
(Voir page 15 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Amplificateur  
Subwoofer  
Caisson de grave  
or / ou  
3
4
3
4
*
*
Fil d’alimentation à distance  
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas  
recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil  
peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.  
*
*
Remote lead  
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with  
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to  
the unit.  
5
5
*
Coupez les fils des enceintes arrière du connecteur ISO de la voiture et connectez-les à l’amplificateur.  
*
Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and connect them to the amplifier.  
4
CD RECEIVER  
CD-RECEIVER  
РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ  
KD-G441/KD-G351  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 5.  
Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 5.  
Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 5.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.  
Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG  
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ  
GET0500-006A  
[EY]  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided  
with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on  
This symbol is only valid in  
the European Union.  
the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will  
help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.  
For safety...  
Information for Users on Disposal of Old  
Equipment  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
This symbol indicates that the product with  
this symbol should not be disposed as general  
household waste at its end-of-life. If you wish to  
dispose of this product, please do so in accordance  
with applicable national legislation or other rules in  
your country and municipality. By disposing of this  
product correctly, you will help to conserve natural  
resources and will help prevent potential negative  
effects on the environment and human health.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
The control panel illustrations used for explanation  
in this manual is of KD-G441.  
Warning:  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
2
How to reset your unit  
CONTENTS  
Control panel — KD-G441/KD-G351........ 4  
Getting started................................. 5  
Basic operations....................................................  
5
Radio operations .............................. 6  
FM RDS operations............................ 7  
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme ...  
7
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Disc/USB device operations ............... 10  
Playing a disc in the unit ...................................... 10  
Playing from a USB device..................................... 10  
Sound adjustments........................... 13  
General settings — PSM ................... 14  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
Other external component  
operations .................................... 16  
How to use the M MODE button  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons will work  
as different function buttons.  
Remote controller — RM-RK50 ......... 17  
More about this unit ......................... 18  
Maintenance .................................... 21  
Troubleshooting............................... 22  
Specifications................................... 24  
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Detaching the control panel  
To use these buttons for their original functions,  
press M MODE again.  
• Waiting for about 5 seconds without pressing any of  
these buttons will automatically cancels the functions  
mode.  
KD-G441 is equipped with the steering wheel  
remote control function.  
• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate  
volume) for connection.  
Attaching the control panel  
3
Control panel —  
KD-G441/KD-G351  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons  
2 0 (eject) button  
o
;
a
s
d
f
g
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
Number buttons  
RPT (repeat) button  
RND (random) button  
3
4
5
(standby/on attenuator) button  
Control dial  
Remote sensor  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
• For KD-G441: You can control this unit with an  
optionally purchased remote controller. For  
details, see page 17.  
USB (Universal Serial Bus) input jack  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Time countdown indicator  
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
BAND button  
Loading slot  
Display window  
T/P (traffic programme/programme type) button  
DISP (display) button  
(control panel release) button  
SRC (source) button  
h
j
k
Tr (track) indicator  
RDS indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer) indicators  
—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ, ROCK, POPS, USER  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
l
/
z
x
c
e 4 /¢ buttons  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
r
t
y
u
i
AUX (auxiliary) button  
SEL (select) button  
M MODE button  
EQ (equalizer) button  
MO (monaural) button  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (folder), (track/file)  
DISC indicator  
v
b
Main display  
4
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
Getting started  
To restore the sound, press the  
button again.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
To turn off the power  
Ÿ
Basic settings  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages  
14 – 16.  
* You cannot select these sources if they are not  
ready or not connected.  
1
2
! For FM/AM tuner  
⁄ Adjust the volume.  
1
2
Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK HOUR”, then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK MIN” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
Select “24H/12H,” then “24 HOUR” or  
“12 HOUR”.  
Volume level appears.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
3
Finish the procedure.  
page 13.)  
Caution on volume setting:  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Digital devices (CD/USB) produce very little noise  
compared with other sources. Lower the volume  
before playing these digital sources to avoid  
damaging the speakers by sudden increase of the  
output level.  
Clock time is shown on the display for  
about 5 seconds. See also page 14.  
5
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Ÿ
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
! Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
To tune in to a station manually  
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
In step ! above...  
1
2
3
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
6
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.50MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
FM RDS operations  
What you can do with RDS  
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to send an  
additional signal along with their regular programme  
signals.  
1
2
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the  
following:  
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)  
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby  
Receptions (see pages 8, 9, and 15)  
3
• Tracing the same programme automatically  
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 9)  
• Programme Search (see pages 9 and 15)  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Searching for your favorite  
FM RDS programme  
Listening to a preset station  
1
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite  
programme by searching for a PTY code.  
• To store your favorite programme types, see page 8.  
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
~
The last selected PTY code  
appears.  
or  
Ÿ Select one of your favorite programme  
types.  
To check the other information while  
or  
listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station  
• For FM RDS stations, see page 9.  
Select one of the PTY codes (see  
page 9).  
Frequency Ô Clock  
Continued on the next page  
7
! Start searching for your favorite  
Using the standby receptions  
TA Standby Reception  
programme.  
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any  
source other than AM.  
If there is a station broadcasting a programme  
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that  
station is tuned in.  
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the  
current level is lower than the preset level (see  
page 15).  
To activate TA Standby Reception  
Storing your favorite programme  
types  
The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator  
either lights up or flashes.  
You can store six favorite programme types.  
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is  
activated.  
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is  
not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening  
to an FM station without the RDS signals required for  
TA Standby Reception.)  
Preset programme types in the number buttons  
(1 to 6):  
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another  
station providing these signals. The TP indicator will  
stop flashing and remain lit.  
1
2
Select a PTY code (see pages 7 and 8).  
Select the preset number (1 – 6) you want to  
store into.  
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception  
The TP indicator goes off.  
PTY Standby Reception  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any  
source other than AM.  
Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected  
3
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY codes  
into other preset numbers.  
To activate and select your favorite PTY code for  
PTY Standby Reception, see page 15.  
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.  
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception  
is activated.  
Finish the procedure.  
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is  
not yet activated.  
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to another  
station providing these signals. The PTY indicator will  
stop flashing and remain lit.  
8
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select  
“OFF” for the PTY code (see page 15). The PTY indicator  
goes off.  
Automatic station selection—  
Programme Search  
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset  
station is tuned in.  
Tracing the same programme—  
Network-Tracking Reception  
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not  
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF  
data, tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the  
same programme as the original preset station is  
broadcasting.  
When driving in an area where FM reception is not  
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to  
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly  
broadcasting the same programme with stronger  
signals (see the illustration below).  
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another  
station using programme search.  
• See also page 15.  
When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking  
Reception is activated.  
To change the Network-Tracking Reception  
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 15.  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM RDS station  
Station name (PS) = Station  
Frequency = Programme type  
(PTY) = Clock = (back to the  
beginning)  
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas  
(01 – 05)  
PTY codes  
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,  
SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY  
M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),  
WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE  
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),  
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT  
9
Ÿ
Disc / USB device  
operations  
: For built-in CD player operations.  
: For external USB device operations.  
USB memory  
If a USB device has been attached...  
Playing a disc in the unit  
Playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• If a different USB device is currently attached,  
playback starts from the beginning.  
To detach the USB device, straightly pull it out from  
the unit.  
• Removing the USB device will also stop playback.  
Then, press SRC to listen to another playback source.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the  
source or eject the disc.  
Cautions:  
To stop play and eject the disc  
• Avoid using the USB device if it might hinder your  
safety driving.  
• Do not pull out or attach the USB device  
repeatedly while “READING” appears on the  
display.  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
Playing from a USB device  
• Do not start a car engine if a USB device is  
connected.  
• This unit may not be able to play the files  
depending on the type of the USB device.  
• Operation and power supply may not work as  
intended for some USB devices.  
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB  
device (except HDD).  
All tracks in the USB device will be played repeatedly  
until you change the source.  
• You cannot connect a computer to the USB input  
jack of the unit.  
• Make sure all important data has been backed up  
to avoid losing the data.  
USB input jack  
~
• Do not leave a USB device in the car, expose to  
direct sunlight, or high temperature to avoid  
deformation or cause damage to the USB device.  
• Some USB devices may not work immediately  
after you turn on the power.  
• For more details about USB operations, see pages  
19 and 20.  
10  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous track  
Other main functions  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3/WMA, you can skip tracks within the same  
folder.  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
To go to the next or previous folder (for  
MP3/WMA)  
1
2
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA) directly  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
3
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA, it is  
required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3/WMA):  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
11  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or CD Text  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
1
A = B = Disc title/performer*1 = Track  
title* 1 [ ] = (back to the beginning)  
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
While playing an MP3/WMA disc or  
USB device  
• When “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 16)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
The current track. [  
TRACK RPT  
:
]
FOLDER RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.  
[
]
RPT OFF  
:
Cancels.  
A = B = Album name/performer (folder  
name*2) [  
] = Track title (file  
7
Random play  
name*2) [  
] = (back to the beginning)  
Mode  
Plays at random  
• When “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF”  
FOLDER RND * : All tracks of the current folder,  
then the tracks of the next folder  
A = B = Folder name [ ] = File name  
and so on. [  
]
[
] = (back to the beginning)  
ALL RND  
RND OFF  
:
:
All tracks of the current disc or  
USB device. [  
Cancels.  
]
A
B
:
:
The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
Clock with the current track number  
*
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/USB).  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the  
display  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
2
12  
Indication, [Range]  
Sound adjustments  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
BASS *2, [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
MIDDLE *2 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
1
2
TREBLE *2, [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
FADER *3, [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
Preset values  
BAS MID TRE LOUD  
Indication (For)  
BALANCE *4, [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
USER  
(Flat sound)  
00  
00 00 OFF  
LOUD *5 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
+03 00 +02 OFF  
+01 00 +03 OFF  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 OFF  
+03 00 +03 OFF  
SUB.W*1, [00 to 08, initial: 04]  
Adjust the subwoofer output level.  
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
POPS  
(Light music)  
VOL ADJ (volume adjust), [–05 to +05, initial: 00]  
Adjust the volume level of each source (except FM), in  
relation to the FM volume level. The volume level will  
automatically increase or decrease when you change  
the source.  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
• Before making an adjustment, select the source you  
want to adjust.  
BAS: Bass MID: Mid-range TRE: Treble LOUD: Loudness  
VOLUME, [00 to 50 or 00 to 30] *6  
Adjust the volume.  
1
*
*
For KD-G441: Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set  
to “SUB.W” (see page 15).  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
2
3
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the  
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently  
selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.  
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be  
applied to all sound modes.  
1
*
4
5
*
*
2
6
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 16 for details.)  
13  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table below and on pages 15 and 16.  
1
2
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
Select a PSM item.  
5
Finish the procedure.  
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
DEMO  
Display demonstration  
• DEMO ON  
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [5].  
Cancels.  
• DEMO OFF  
:
:
CLOCK DISP *1  
Clock display  
• CLOCK ON  
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the  
power is turned off.  
• CLOCK OFF  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about  
5 seconds when the power is turned off, [5].  
CLOCK HOUR  
0 – 23 (1 – 12) [Initial: 0 (0:00)], [5].  
Hour adjustment  
CLOCK MIN  
00 – 59  
[Initial: 00 (0:00)], [5].  
Minute adjustment  
24H/12H  
• 24 HOUR  
:
See also page 5 for setting.  
Time display mode  
• 12 HOUR  
CLOCK ADJ *2  
Clock adjustment  
• AUTO  
:
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock  
time) data in the RDS signal.  
Cancels.  
• OFF  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select  
“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.  
14  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
AF-REG *2  
Alternative  
frequency/  
regionalization  
reception  
• AF  
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit  
switches to another station (the programme may differ from the  
one currently received), [9].  
• The AF indicator lights up.  
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit  
switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.  
• The AF and REG indicators light up.  
• AF-REG  
Cancels.  
• AF OFF  
PTY-STANDBY *2  
OFF, PTY codes Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [8, 9].  
PTY standby  
TA VOLUME *2  
Traffic  
announcement  
volume  
VOLUME 00  
[Initial: VOLUME 15]  
– VOLUME 50  
(or VOLUME 00  
– VOLUME 30)*3  
P-SEARCH *2  
Programme search • OFF  
• ON  
:
:
Activates Programme Search, [9].  
Cancels.  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
• ON  
• OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
TEL MUTING  
Telephone muting  
• MUTING 1/  
MUTING 2  
• MUTING OFF  
:
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular  
phone.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL *4  
Scroll  
• ONCE  
• AUTO  
• OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
L/O MODE *5  
Line output mode  
• REAR  
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the  
speakers (through an external amplifier).  
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a  
subwoofer (through an external amplifier).  
• SUB.W  
2
*
*
*
*
Only for FM RDS stations.  
Depends on the amplifier gain control.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
For KD-G441.  
3
4
5
Continued on the next page  
15  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
SUB.W FREQ*6  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
• LOW  
• MID  
• HIGH  
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
TAG DISPLAY  
Tag display  
• TAG ON  
• TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [12].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
• LOW POWER  
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the  
speaker is less than 50 W to avoid them from damaging the speaker.)  
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
• HIGH POWER  
:
:
IF BAND  
Intermediate  
frequency band  
• AUTO  
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noise between  
close stations. (The stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to the interference noise from adjacent stations, but the  
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.  
• WIDE  
:
6
*
For KD-G441: Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”  
Other external component operations  
You can connect an external component to the  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
Portable audio player, etc  
page 13.)  
3.5 mm stereo mini  
plug (not supplied)  
To check the other information while  
listening to an external component  
~
AUX IN Ô Clock  
• You can also select “AUX IN” as the playback  
source by pressing the SRC (source) button.  
16  
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
KD-G441 can be remotely controlled as instructed here  
(with an optionally purchased remote controller). We  
recommend that you use remote controller RM-RK50  
with your unit.  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.  
Warning:  
3
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or  
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as the dashboard) exposed to direct  
sunlight for a long time; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid the risk of accidents.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
4
5
SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
17  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
More about this unit  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• By pressing SRC or AUX on the unit, you can also turn  
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also  
starts.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA  
formats.  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as  
those which are detected first if a disc includes both  
audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on  
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for  
the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
FM RDS operations  
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of  
RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF  
(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without  
receiving these data correctly, Network-Tracking  
Reception will not operate correctly.  
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby  
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to  
the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower  
than the preset level.  
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated  
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is  
also activated automatically.  
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit  
<http://www.rds.org.uk>.  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
18  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 255  
folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB device  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
• While playing from a USB device, the playback order  
may differ from other players.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some USB  
devices or some files due to their characteristics or  
recording conditions.  
• Depending on the shape of the USB devices and  
connection ports, some USB devices may not be  
attached properly or the connection might be loose.  
• Connect one USB mass storage class device to the unit  
at a time. Do not use a USB hub.  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
– Bit rate of WMA: 16 kbps — 32 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 22.05 kHz)  
32 kbps — 320 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 48 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)  
• If the connected USB device does not have the correct  
files, “NO FILE” appears.  
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
Continued on the next page  
19  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate of MP3: 16 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency of MP3:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5)  
– Bit rate of WMA:  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops.  
Next time you select the same source again, playback  
starts from where it has been stopped previously.  
Ejecting a disc or removing a USB device  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust.  
• After ejecting a disc or removing a USB device,  
“NO DISC” or “NO USB“ appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,  
reattach a USB device, or press SRC to select another  
playback source.  
16 kbps — 32 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 22.05 kHz)  
32 kbps — 320 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)  
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
• The maximum number of characters for:  
– Folder names : 25 characters  
General settings—PSM  
– File names : 25 characters  
– MP3 Tag : 128 characters  
– WMA Tag : 64 characters  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOLUME 30.”  
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files, 255  
folders (999 files per folder), and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit does not support SD card reader.  
• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating  
is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.  
• USB devices equipped with special functions such as  
data security functions cannot be used with the unit.  
• Do not use a USB device with 2 or more partitions.  
• This unit may not recognize a USB device connected  
through a USB card reader.  
• This unit may not play back files in a USB device  
properly when using a USB extension cord.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
• Use a shielded USB cable of less than 1 m in length.  
20  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
To keep discs clean  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
Connectors  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Center holder  
Sticker and  
sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
Unusual shape  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
21  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 3).  
Store stations manually.  
Connect the aerial firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which  
you used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 11).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and ”EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file  
names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
22  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you  
have intended.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
album name).  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to  
another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or  
<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• “READING” keeps flashing on the display.  
• Readout time varies depending on the USB device.  
• Do not use too many hierarchy, folders, and empty  
folders*.  
• Turn off the power then on again.  
• Reattach the USB device again.  
* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains  
data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.  
• Tracks/folders are not played back in the  
order you have intended.  
The playback order is determined by the write-in time  
stamp. The first track/folder written into the USB device  
will be the first track/folder for playback.  
• “NO FILE” flashes on the display.  
• “NO USB” appears on the display.  
• The unit cannot detect the USB device.  
• Attach a USB device that contains tracks encoded in an  
appropriate format.  
• Reattach the USB device again.  
• “READ” and “FAILED” appear alternately on The total number of tracks could not be accessed properly.  
the display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.  
album name).  
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• While playing a track, sound is sometimes  
interrupted.  
The MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into  
the USB device.  
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB device, and try  
again.  
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
23  
Specifications  
Maximum Power  
Output:  
Front/Rear:  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Continuous Power  
Output (RMS):  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to  
20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total  
harmonic distortion  
Load Impedance:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
Tone Control Range: Bass:  
Middle:  
Treble:  
12 dB at 1 kHz  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
Frequency Response:  
Signal to Noise Ratio:  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
70 dB  
Audio Output Level: Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
1 kΩ  
(for KD-G441)  
Output Impedance:  
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:  
Other Terminals:  
2.5 V /20 kΩ load (full scale)  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, USB input  
jack, Steering wheel remote input (for  
KD-G441)  
Frequency Range:  
FM Tuner:  
FM:  
AM:  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz  
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz  
Usable Sensitivity:  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response:  
Stereo Separation:  
Sensitivity/Selectivity:  
Sensitivity:  
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
30 dB  
MW Tuner:  
LW Tuner:  
20 μV/35 dB  
50 μV  
24  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)  
Number of Channels:  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Wow and Flutter:  
98 dB  
Less than measurable limit  
320 kbps  
MP3 Decoding Format:  
(MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
Max. Bit Rate:  
WMA (Windows Media® Max. Bit Rate:  
Audio) Decoding Format:  
320 kbps  
USB Standard:  
USB 1.1, USB 2.0  
Max. 12 Mbps  
Data Transfer Rate (Full Speed):  
Storage:  
Less than 8 GB (1 partition type)  
Mass storage class (except HDD)  
FAT 32/16/12  
Compatible Device:  
Compatible File System:  
Playable Audio Format:  
Max. Current:  
MP3/WMA  
500 mA  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
Dimensions (W × H × D): Installation Size (approx.):  
Panel Size (approx.):  
0°C to +40°C  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
188 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
Mass (approx.):  
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
25  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?  
Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück  
Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts  
Затруднения при эксплуатации?  
Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство  
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства обратитесь на  
соответствующую страницу  
Dear Customer,  
Уважаемый клиент.  
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European  
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic  
compatibility and electrical safety.  
Данное устройство соответствует действительным  
Европейским директивам и стандартам по электромагнитной  
совместимости и электрической безопасности.  
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
is:  
Представительство компании Victor Company of Japan,  
Limited в Европе:  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
Germany  
Германия  
Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte Kundin,  
dieses Gerät stimmt mit den gültigen europäischen Richtlinien  
und Normen bezüglich elektromagnetischer Verträglichkeit  
und elektrischer Sicherheit überein.  
Die europäische Vertretung für die Victor Company of Japan,  
Limited ist:  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
Deutschland  
EN, GE, RU  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1107DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-G441/KD-G351  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Einbau/Anschlußanleitung  
Руководство по установке/подключению  
1107DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, GE, RU  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0500-013A  
[EY]  
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
РУССКИЙ  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground  
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a  
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.  
Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in elektrischen Anlagen mit 12 V  
Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В  
Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht постоянного напряжения с минусом на массе. Если Ваш  
über diese Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der bei JVC  
Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.  
автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор  
напряжения, который может быть приобретен у дилера  
автомобилнего специалиста JVC.  
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ  
Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем  
Вам отсоединить отрицательный разъем аккумулятора и  
осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.  
• После установки обязательно заземлите данное  
устройство на шасси автомобиля.  
WARNINGS  
WARNUNGEN  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the  
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before  
installing the unit.  
Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir, daß Sie den  
negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse  
herstellen, bevor das Gerät eingebaut wird.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after  
installation.  
• Sicherstellen erneut, daß das Gerät nach dem Einbau Chassis  
des Fahrzeugs geerdet wird.  
Примечания:  
Notes:  
Hinweise:  
• Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем  
указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком  
часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.  
• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной  
мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели  
устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω). Если  
максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в  
режим “AMP GAIN”, чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.  
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 16).  
• Для предотвращения коротких замыканий обмотайте  
терминалы НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫХ проводов изоляционной  
лентой.  
• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.  
Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows  
frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power  
of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an  
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,  
change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being  
damaged (see page 16 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads  
with insulating tape.  
• Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden Nennleistung ersetzen.  
Brennt die Sicherung häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC  
Autoradiohändler.  
• Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit einer Maximalleistung von  
mehr als 50 W anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne, mit  
einer Impedanz von 4 Ω bis 8 Ω). Wenn die Maximalleistung  
weniger als 50 W beträgt, stellen Sie „AMP GAIN“ anders ein, um  
Schäden an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite 16 der  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).  
• Um Kurzschlüsse zu verhindern, die Klemmen der NICHT  
VERWENDETEN Leitungen mit Isolierband abdecken.  
• Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr heiß. Beim Ausbau  
des Geräts darauf achten, das Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it  
when removing this unit.  
Heat sink  
Abstrahlblech  
Радиатор  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim Anschließen  
connections: der Stromversorgung und Lautsprecher:  
ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и  
подключению громкоговорителей:  
• НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к  
аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе устройство будет  
повреждено.  
• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей  
к кабелю питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему  
соединений громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels NICHT an der  
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the  
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.  
Autobatterie anschließen, da sonst das Gerät schwer  
beschädigt wird.  
• VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen des  
Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die Lautsprecher, die  
Lautsprecherverdrahtung in Ihrem Auto überprüfen.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem Gerät geliefert.  
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately. Falls ein Artikel fehlt, wenden Sie sich sofort an Ihren JVC-  
Autoradiohändler.  
Teileliste für den Einbau und Anschluß  
Список деталей для установки и  
подключения  
Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством.  
При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с  
дилером автомобильного специалиста JVC.  
A / B  
C
D
Hard case (only for KD-G441)/Control panel  
Etui (nur für KD-G441)/Schalttafel  
Жесткий футляр (только для KD-G441)/  
панель управления  
Sleeve  
Halterung  
Муфта  
Trim plate  
Frontrahmen  
Декоративную панель  
E
F
G
Power cord  
Stromkable  
Кабель питания  
Washer (ø5)  
Unterlegscheibe (ø5)  
Шайба (њ5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Sicherungsmutter (M5)  
Фиксирующая гайка (M5)  
J
I
H
Handles  
Griffe  
Рычаги  
Rubber cushion  
Gummipuffer  
Резиновый чехол  
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12,5 mm)  
Befestigungsschraube (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12,5 mm)  
Крепежный болт (M4 × 5 мм; M5 × 12,5 мм)  
1
INSTALLATION  
EINBAU  
УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В  
ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)  
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
(IM ARMATURENBRETT)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have  
any questions or require information regarding installation kits,  
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company  
supplying kits.  
Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen Einbau. Bei irgendwelchen На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка.  
Fragen oder wenn Sie Informationen hinsichtlich des Einbausatzes  
brauchen, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC Autoradiohändler oder ein  
Unternehmen das diese Einbausätze vertreibt.  
Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, касающиеся установки,  
обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC или  
в компанию, поставляющую соответствующие принадлежности.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed • Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des Geräts nicht sicher, lassen • Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это  
by a qualified technician.  
Sie es von einem qualifizierten Techniker einbauen.  
устройство, обратитесь к квалифицированному специалисту.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen Anschlüsse vor.  
Выполните необходимые подключения контактов, как  
показано на оборотной стороне этой инструкции.  
For KD-G441  
Bei KD-G441  
Для KD-G441  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um die  
Manschette sicher festzuhalten.  
Отогните соответствующие  
фиксаторы, предназначенные для  
прочной установки корпуса.  
Removing the unit  
Ausbau des Geräts  
Удаление устройства  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil freigeben.  
Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated  
so that the unit can be removed.  
Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann ziehen wie  
in der Abbildung gezeigt, so daß das Gerät entfernt  
werden kann.  
Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните их, как  
показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть устройство.  
When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden  
der Anker-Option / При использовании  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne  
Halterung / При установке устройства без использования муфты  
дополнительной стойки  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Stay (option)  
Zum Beispiel in einem Toyota zuerst das Autoradio ausbauen und dann das Gerät an seinem Platz einbauen.  
В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите устройство на место.  
Fire wall  
Feuerwand  
Стена  
Anker (Option)  
Стойка  
(дополнительно)  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Flachkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Болты с плоской головкой  
(M5 × 8 мм)*2  
Dashboard  
Armaturenbrett  
Приборная панель  
Bracket*2  
Konsole*2  
Кронштейн*2  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Screw (option)  
Flachkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Schraube (Option)  
Pocket  
Taschen  
Карман  
Болты с плоской головкой  
(M5 × 8 мм)*2  
Винт (дополнительно)  
Bracket*2  
Konsole*2  
Кронштейн*2  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
: Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet werden. Werden  
längere Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Stellen Sie das Gerät mit einem Winkel  
von weniger als 30˚ auf.  
Установите устройство под углом  
менее 30°.  
Hinweis  
Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм. При  
использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.  
1
1
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Beim Aufstellen des Geräts darauf achten, daß die Sicherung auf der  
Rückseite nicht beschädigt wird.  
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.  
*
*
Устанавливайте устройство таким образом, чтобы не повредить  
предохранитель, расположенный сзади.  
Hе входит в комплект поставки.  
2
2
2
BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
FEHLERSUCHE  
• Сработал предохранитель.  
• The fuse blows.  
• Die Sicherung brennt durch.  
* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig angeschlossen?  
• Питание не включается.  
* Подключен ли желтый провод?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet werden.  
* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?  
• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.  
* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода  
громкоговорителей?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
*
Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Ton verzerrt.  
• Звук искажен.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?  
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher  
zusammen geerdet?  
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?  
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)  
громкоговорителей?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using  
• Störgeräusche im Klang.  
• Шум мешает звучанию.  
* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси  
автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?  
shorter and thicker cords?  
* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren und dickeren Kabeln an  
das Fahrzeugchassis angeschlossen?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
• Gerät wird heiß.  
• Устройство нагревается.  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?  
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher  
zusammen geerdet?  
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?  
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)  
громкоговорителей?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Dieser Receiver funktioniert überhaupt nicht.  
* Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen?  
• Приемник не работает.  
* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?  
2
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
РУССКИЙ  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE  
ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ  
If your car is equipped with the ISO connector / For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobiles / Bei bestimmten VW-/Audi- or Opel-  
A
Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit dem ISO-Steckverbinder (Vauxhall-) Fahrzeugen / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi или Opel (Vauxhall)  
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.  
ausgestattet ist / Если автомобиль оснащен  
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.  
разъемом ISO  
Es kann erforderlich sein, die Verdrahtung des mitgelieferten Stromkabels zu modifizieren, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.  
• Wenden Sie sich vor dem Einbau dieses Receivers an Ihre Auto-Fachwerkstatt.  
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.  
Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.  
• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.  
• Schließen Sie die ISO-Steckverbinder an, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.  
• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.  
Original wiring / Original verdrahtung /  
Исходная схема соединений  
Modified wiring 1 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 1 /  
Преобразованная схема соединений 1  
From the car body  
Von der Fahrzeugkarosserie  
A
C
B
D
От корпуса автомобиля  
E
F
G
H
ISO connector  
ISO-Steckverbinder  
Разъем ISO  
Use modified wiring  
Verwenden Sie die modifizierte Verdrahtung  
Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную схему  
соединений  
2
if the unit does not turn on.  
2
wenn der Receiver nicht einschaltet.  
ISO connector of the supplied power cord  
I
J
L
2.  
ISO-Stecker des mitgelieferten Stromkabels  
Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в  
комплект поставки  
K
M
O
N
P
Modified wiring 2 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 2 /  
Преобразованная схема соединений 2  
Y: Yellow  
Gelb  
Желтый  
R: Red  
View from the lead side  
Von der Kabelseite aus gesehen  
Вид со стороны выводов  
Rot  
Красный  
Connections without using the ISO connector / Anschlüsse ohne Verwendung des ISO-Steckverbinders / Подключение без использования  
разъема ISO  
B
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.  
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.  
Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug sorgfältig  
Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте  
проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное подключение может  
привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.  
überprüfen. Falsche Anschlüsse können ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car hervorrufen.  
body may be different in color.  
Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des Anschlusses im Fahrzeug Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова  
können sich farblich unterscheiden.  
автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.  
1 Cut the ISO connector.  
1 Schneiden Sie den ISO-Steckverbinder auf.  
1 Обрежьте разъем ISO.  
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order  
specified in the illustration below.  
2 Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der Reihenfolge anschließen, 2 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в  
wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt.  
3 Das Antennenkabel anschließen.  
4 Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.  
указанном ниже порядке.  
3 Connect the aerial cord.  
3 Подключите кабель антенны.  
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
4 В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к  
устройству.  
Line out (see diagram )—only for KD-G441  
Schutz kappen Signalausgang (siehe Schaltplan )—nur für KD-G441  
К выходу (см. схему )—только для KD-G441  
Rear ground terminal  
Hintere Erdungsc-anschlußklemme  
Задний разъем заземления  
Aerial terminal  
15 A fuse  
15 A Sicherung  
Предохранитель 15 A  
Antennen-  
anschlußklemme  
Разъем антенны  
OE  
Steering wheel remote input (see  
diagram )—only for KD-G441  
Eingang für Lenkradfernbedienung  
(siehe Schaltplan )—nur für  
KD-G441  
Вход рулевого пульта  
дистанционного управления (см.  
схему )—только для KD-G441  
Ignition switch  
Zündschalter  
Переключатель  
зажигания  
Black  
Schwarz  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
Черный  
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos  
К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля  
Yellow*2  
Gelb*2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the  
ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum  
Anschließen an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)  
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)  
(постоянный 12 В)  
Желтый*2  
Red  
Rot  
Красный  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock  
К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя  
Fuse block  
Sicherungsblock  
Блок предохранителя  
Blue with white stripe  
Blau mit weißem Streifen  
Синий с белой полосой  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any  
(200 mA max.)  
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern  
vorhanden (max. 200 mA)  
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны  
(макс. 200 мА)  
Brown  
Braun  
To cellular phone system  
Zur Mobiltelefon  
К системе сотового телефона  
Коричневый  
White with black stripe  
Weiß mit schwarzem  
Streifen  
Белый с черной  
полосой  
White  
Weiß  
Белый  
Gray with black stripe  
Grau mit schwarzem Streifen  
Серый с черной полосой  
Gray  
Green  
Purple with black stripe  
Lila mit schwarzem Streifen  
Пурпурный с черной  
полосой  
Purple  
Green with black stripe  
Grün mit schwarzem Streifen  
Зеленый с черной полосой  
Grau  
Grün  
Lila  
Серый  
Зеленый  
Пурпурный  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)  
Правый громкоговоритель  
(передний)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)  
Левый громкоговоритель  
(передний)  
Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)  
Левый громкоговоритель  
(задний)  
Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)  
Правый громкоговоритель  
(задний)  
1
1
1
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this  
lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot be turned on.  
*
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.  
*
Не входит в комплект поставки.  
Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот провод,  
иначе питание не включится.  
2
2
2
*
*
Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit des Geräts vor dem  
Einbau, muß diese Leitung angeschlossen werden, da sonst die  
Stromversorgung nicht eingeschaltet werden kann.  
*
3
Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller (only for KD-G441) / Anschluß an die Lenkradfernbedienung (nur für KD-G441) /  
Подключение к рулевому пульту дистанционного управления (только для KD-G441)  
C
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller,  
Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit einer Lenkradferndienung ausgestattet ist,  
können Sie damit diesen Receiver steuern. Hierfür ist ein für Ihr  
Fahrzeug passender Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption von  
JVC (nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten) erforderlich. Für weitere  
Einzelheiten wenden Sie sich an Ihren JVC Autoradiohändler.  
Если автомобиль оборудован рулевым пультом  
you can operate this unit using the controller. To do it, a JVC’s  
OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is  
required. Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer  
for details.  
дистанционного управления, его можно использовать для  
управления данным устройством. Для этого необходим  
адаптер рулевого пульта дистанционного управления JVC  
OE (не поставляется), подходящий для Вашего автомобиля.  
За более подробной информацией обратитесь к поставщику  
автомобильных аудиосистем компании JVC.  
OE remote adapter (not supplied)  
Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption (nicht  
im Lieferumfang enthalten)  
Aдаптер рулевого пульта дистанционного  
управления OE (не поставляется)  
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)  
Lenkradfernbedienung (im Fahrzeug installiert)  
Рулевой пульт дистанционного управления  
(устанавливаемый в автомобиле)  
OE  
Steering wheel remote input  
Eingang für Lenkradfernbedienung  
Вход рулевого пульта  
дистанционного управления  
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer (only for KD-G441) / Anschließen des externen Verstärkers oder Subwoofers (nur für KD-G441) /  
Подключение внешнего усилителя или низкочастотного динамика (только для KD-G441)  
D
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
Sie können einen Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre Autostereoanlage zu  
erweitern.  
• Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit weißem Streifen) an  
das Fernbedienungskabel des anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses  
Gerät gesteuert werden kann.  
• Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät abtrennen und am  
Verstärker anschließen. Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses  
Geräts unbenutzt lassen.  
Для обновления автомобильной стереосистемы можно  
подключить усилитель.  
• Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с  
белой полосой) к проводу внешнего устройства другого  
оборудования так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого  
устройства.  
• Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного  
устройства, подключите их к усилителю. Оставьте  
провода громкоговорителей данного устройства  
неиспользованными.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote  
lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through  
this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the  
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Y-Anschluß (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)  
Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)  
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 15 of  
the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Stellen Sie „L/O MODE“ auf „REAR“ (siehe  
Seite 15 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).  
Для параметра “L/O MODE” установите  
значение “REAR” (см. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО  
ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 15).  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Fernbedienungsleitung (blau mit weißem Streifen)  
Провод внешнего устройства (cиний с белой полосой)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or  
power aerial if any  
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder  
der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden  
К удаленному проводу другого  
оборудования или антенны  
Rear speakers  
JVC Amplifier  
Hintere Lautsprecher  
JVC Verstärker  
Задние  
JVC-усилитель  
громкоговорители  
Signal cord (not supplied for this  
unit)  
Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät  
mitgeliefert)  
Кабель сигнала (не входит в  
комплект поставки)  
Rear speakers  
Hintere Lautsprecher  
Задние громкоговорители  
Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W” (See page 15  
of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Stellen Sie „L/O MODE“ auf „SUB.W“ (siehe  
Seite 15 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).  
Для параметра “L/O MODE” установите  
значение “SUB.W” (см. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО  
ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 15).  
Front speakers (see diagram  
)
Vordere Lautsprecher (siehe  
Schaltplan  
)
Передние громкоговорители  
(см. схему  
)
Subwoofer  
JVC Amplifier  
Subwoofer  
JVC Verstärker  
Низкочастотный  
or / oder / или  
JVC-усилитель  
динамик  
3
3
3
4
*
Remote lead  
*
*
Fernbedienungsleitung  
*
*
Провод внешнего устройства  
4
4
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of  
the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove  
the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage  
to the unit.  
Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der Karosserie oder dem Rahmen  
des Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte die  
Kontaktstelle lackiert sein, entfernen Sie den Lack der Kontaktstelle, bevor  
Sie den Leiter befestigen). Wenn der Erdungsleiter nicht ordnungsgemäß  
angeschlossen wird, kann dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.  
Schneiden Sie die hinteren Lautsprecherkabel des ISO-Steckverbinders des  
Fahrzeugs ab, und schließen diese an den Verstärker an.  
Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод к металлическому  
кузову или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской  
(если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску перед тем, как  
прикреплять провод). Невыполнение этого требования может  
привести к повреждению данного устройства.  
5
*
Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and connect them  
to the amplifier.  
5
5
*
*
Отрежьте провода задних громкоговорителей разъема ISO и  
подсоедините их к усилителю.  
4
CD RECEIVER  
РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ  
ПРИЙМАЧ З ПРОГРАВАЧЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКІВ  
KD-G447/KD-G357  
В соответствии с Законом Российской Федерации “О защите прав потребителей” срок службы (годности) данного  
товара “по истечении которого он может представлять опасность для жизни, здоровья потребителя, причинять вред  
его имуществу или окружающей среде” составляет семь (7) лет со дня производства. Этот срок является временем,  
в течение которого потребитель данного товара может безопасно им пользоваться при условии соблюдения  
инструкции по эксплуатации данного товара, проводя необходимое обслуживание, включающее замену расходных  
материалов и/или соответствующее ремонтное обеспечение в специализированном сервисном центре.  
Дополнительные косметические материалы к данному товару, поставляемые вместе с ним, могут храниться в  
течение двух (2) лет со дня его производства.  
Срок службы (годности), кроме срока хранения дополнительных косметических материалов, упомянутых  
в предыдущих двух пунктах, не затрагивает никаких других прав потребителя, в частности, гарантийного  
свидетельства JVC, которое он может получить в соответствии с законом о правах потребителя или других законов,  
связанных с ним.  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 5.  
Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 5.  
Інформацію щодо відміни демонстрації функцій дисплею див. на стор. 5.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.  
Вказівки по встановленню та виконанню підключень наведені у окремій інструкції.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ  
ІНСТРУКЦІЇ  
GET0543-001A  
[EE]  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
[European Union only]  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
Warning:  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
Caution on volume setting:  
Digital devices (CD/USB) produce very little noise  
compared with other sources. Lower the volume  
before playing these digital sources to avoid  
damaging the speakers by sudden increase of the  
output level.  
2
How to reset your unit  
CONTENTS  
Control panel — KD-G447/KD-G357........ 4  
Getting started................................. 5  
Basic operations....................................................  
5
Radio operations .............................. 6  
FM RDS operations............................ 7  
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme ...  
7
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Disc/USB device operations ............... 10  
Playing a disc in the unit ...................................... 10  
Playing from a USB device..................................... 10  
Sound adjustments........................... 13  
General settings — PSM ................... 14  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
Other external component  
operations .................................... 16  
How to use the M MODE button  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons will work  
as different function buttons.  
Remote controller — RM-RK50 ......... 17  
More about this unit ......................... 18  
Maintenance .................................... 21  
Troubleshooting............................... 22  
Specifications................................... 24  
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Detaching the control panel  
To use these buttons for their original functions,  
press M MODE again.  
• Waiting for about 5 seconds without pressing any of  
these buttons will automatically cancels the functions  
mode.  
Attaching the control panel  
3
Control panel —  
KD-G447/KD-G357  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons  
2 0 (eject) button  
o
;
a
s
d
f
g
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
Number buttons  
RPT (repeat) button  
RND (random) button  
3
4
5
(standby/on attenuator) button  
Control dial  
Remote sensor  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
• For KD-G447: You can control this unit with an  
optionally purchased remote controller. For  
details, see page 17.  
USB (Universal Serial Bus) input jack  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Time countdown indicator  
• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
BAND button  
Loading slot  
Display window  
T/P (traffic programme/programme type) button  
DISP (display) button  
(control panel release) button  
SRC (source) button  
h
j
k
Tr (track) indicator  
RDS indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer) indicators  
—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ, ROCK, POPS, USER  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
l
/
z
x
c
e 4 /¢ buttons  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
r
t
y
u
i
AUX (auxiliary) button  
SEL (select) button  
M MODE button  
EQ (equalizer) button  
MO (monaural) button  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (folder), (track/file)  
DISC indicator  
v
b
Main display  
4
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
Getting started  
To restore the sound, press the  
button again.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
To turn off the power  
Ÿ
Basic settings  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages  
14 – 16.  
* You cannot select these sources if they are not  
ready or not connected.  
1
2
! For FM/AM tuner  
⁄ Adjust the volume.  
1
2
Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK HOUR”, then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK MIN” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
Select “24H/12H,” then “24 HOUR” or  
“12 HOUR”.  
Volume level appears.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
3
Finish the procedure.  
page 13.)  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Clock time is shown on the display for  
about 5 seconds. See also page 14.  
5
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Ÿ
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
! Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
Note:  
FM1 and FM2: 87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz  
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
FM3:  
65.00 MHz – 74.00 MHz  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
2
3
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
6
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.50MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
FM RDS operations  
What you can do with RDS  
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to send an  
additional signal along with their regular programme  
signals.  
1
2
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the  
following:  
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)  
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby  
Receptions (see pages 8, 9, and 15)  
3
• Tracing the same programme automatically  
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 9)  
• Programme Search (see pages 9 and 15)  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Searching for your favorite  
FM RDS programme  
Listening to a preset station  
1
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite  
programme by searching for a PTY code.  
• To store your favorite programme types, see page 8.  
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
~
The last selected PTY code  
appears.  
or  
Ÿ Select one of your favorite programme  
types.  
To check the other information while  
or  
listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station  
• For FM RDS stations, see page 9.  
Select one of the PTY codes (see  
page 9).  
Frequency Ô Clock  
Continued on the next page  
7
! Start searching for your favorite  
Using the standby receptions  
TA Standby Reception  
programme.  
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any  
source other than AM.  
If there is a station broadcasting a programme  
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that  
station is tuned in.  
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the  
current level is lower than the preset level (see  
page 15).  
To activate TA Standby Reception  
Storing your favorite programme  
types  
The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator  
either lights up or flashes.  
You can store six favorite programme types.  
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is  
activated.  
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is  
not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening  
to an FM station without the RDS signals required for  
TA Standby Reception.)  
Preset programme types in the number buttons  
(1 to 6):  
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another  
station providing these signals. The TP indicator will  
stop flashing and remain lit.  
1
2
Select a PTY code (see pages 7 and 8).  
Select the preset number (1 – 6) you want to  
store into.  
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception  
The TP indicator goes off.  
PTY Standby Reception  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any  
source other than AM.  
Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected  
3
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY codes  
into other preset numbers.  
To activate and select your favorite PTY code for  
PTY Standby Reception, see page 15.  
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.  
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception  
is activated.  
Finish the procedure.  
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is  
not yet activated.  
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to another  
station providing these signals. The PTY indicator will  
stop flashing and remain lit.  
8
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select  
“OFF” for the PTY code (see page 15). The PTY indicator  
goes off.  
Automatic station selection—  
Programme Search  
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset  
station is tuned in.  
Tracing the same programme—  
Network-Tracking Reception  
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not  
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF  
data, tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the  
same programme as the original preset station is  
broadcasting.  
When driving in an area where FM reception is not  
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to  
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly  
broadcasting the same programme with stronger  
signals (see the illustration below).  
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another  
station using programme search.  
• See also page 15.  
When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking  
Reception is activated.  
To change the Network-Tracking Reception  
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 15.  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM RDS station  
Station name (PS) = Station  
Frequency = Programme type  
(PTY) = Clock = (back to the  
beginning)  
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas  
(01 – 05)  
PTY codes  
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,  
SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY  
M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),  
WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE  
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),  
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT  
9
Ÿ
Disc / USB device  
operations  
: For built-in CD player operations.  
: For external USB device operations.  
USB memory  
If a USB device has been attached...  
Playing a disc in the unit  
Playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• If a different USB device is currently attached,  
playback starts from the beginning.  
To detach the USB device, straightly pull it out from  
the unit.  
• Removing the USB device will also stop playback.  
Then, press SRC to listen to another playback source.  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the  
source or eject the disc.  
Cautions:  
To stop play and eject the disc  
• Avoid using the USB device if it might hinder your  
safety driving.  
• Do not pull out or attach the USB device  
repeatedly while “READING” appears on the  
display.  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
Playing from a USB device  
• Do not start a car engine if a USB device is  
connected.  
• This unit may not be able to play the files  
depending on the type of the USB device.  
• Operation and power supply may not work as  
intended for some USB devices.  
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB  
device (except HDD).  
All tracks in the USB device will be played repeatedly  
until you change the source.  
• You cannot connect a computer to the USB input  
jack of the unit.  
• Make sure all important data has been backed up  
to avoid losing the data.  
USB input jack  
~
• Do not leave a USB device in the car, expose to  
direct sunlight, or high temperature to avoid  
deformation or cause damage to the USB device.  
• Some USB devices may not work immediately  
after you turn on the power.  
• For more details about USB operations, see pages  
19 and 20.  
10  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous track  
Other main functions  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3/WMA, you can skip tracks within the same  
folder.  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
To go to the next or previous folder (for  
MP3/WMA)  
1
2
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA) directly  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
3
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA, it is  
required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3/WMA):  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
11  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or CD Text  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
1
A = B = Disc title/performer*1 = Track  
title* 1 [ ] = (back to the beginning)  
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
While playing an MP3/WMA disc or  
USB device  
• When “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 16)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
The current track. [  
TRACK RPT  
:
]
FOLDER RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.  
[
]
RPT OFF  
:
Cancels.  
A = B = Album name/performer (folder  
name*2) [  
] = Track title (file  
7
Random play  
name*2) [  
] = (back to the beginning)  
Mode  
Plays at random  
• When “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF”  
FOLDER RND * : All tracks of the current folder,  
then the tracks of the next folder  
A = B = Folder name [ ] = File name  
and so on. [  
All tracks of the current disc or  
]
[
] = (back to the beginning)  
ALL RND  
RND OFF  
:
:
USB device. [  
Cancels.  
]
A
B
:
:
The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
Clock with the current track number  
*
Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/USB).  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the  
display  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
2
12  
Indication, [Range]  
Sound adjustments  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
BASS *1, [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
MIDDLE *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
1
2
TREBLE *1, [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
FADER *2, [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
Preset values  
BAS MID TRE LOUD  
Indication (For)  
BALANCE, [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
USER  
(Flat sound)  
00  
00 00 OFF  
LOUD *3 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
+03 00 +02 OFF  
+01 00 +03 OFF  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 OFF  
+03 00 +03 OFF  
VOL ADJ (volume adjust), [–05 to +05, initial: 00]  
Adjust the volume level of each source (except FM), in  
relation to the FM volume level. The volume level will  
automatically increase or decrease when you change  
the source.  
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
POPS  
(Light music)  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
• Before making an adjustment, select the source you  
want to adjust.  
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
VOLUME, [00 to 50 or 00 to 30] *4  
Adjust the volume.  
BAS: Bass MID: Mid-range TRE: Treble LOUD: Loudness  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the  
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently  
selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
Adjusting the sound  
2
3
4
*
*
*
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be  
applied to all sound modes.  
1
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 16 for details.)  
2
13  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table below and on pages 15 and 16.  
1
2
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
Select a PSM item.  
5
Finish the procedure.  
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
DEMO  
Display demonstration  
• DEMO ON  
:
:
:
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [5].  
Cancels.  
• DEMO OFF  
• CLOCK ON  
• CLOCK OFF  
CLOCK DISP *1  
Clock display  
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the  
power is turned off.  
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about  
5 seconds when the power is turned off, [5].  
CLOCK HOUR  
0 – 23 (1 – 12) [Initial: 0 (0:00)], [5].  
Hour adjustment  
CLOCK MIN  
00 – 59  
[Initial: 00 (0:00)], [5].  
Minute adjustment  
24H/12H  
• 24 HOUR  
:
See also page 5 for setting.  
Time display mode  
• 12 HOUR  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select  
“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.  
14  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
CLOCK ADJ *2  
Clock adjustment  
• AUTO  
:
:
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock  
time) data in the RDS signal.  
Cancels.  
• OFF  
AF-REG *2  
Alternative  
frequency/  
regionalization  
reception  
• AF  
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit  
switches to another station (the programme may differ from the  
one currently received), [9].  
• The AF indicator lights up.  
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit  
switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.  
• The AF and REG indicators light up.  
• AF-REG  
Cancels.  
• AF OFF  
PTY-STANDBY *2  
OFF, PTY codes Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [8, 9].  
PTY standby  
TA VOLUME *2  
Traffic  
announcement  
volume  
VOLUME 00  
[Initial: VOLUME 15]  
– VOLUME 50  
(or VOLUME 00  
– VOLUME 30)*3  
P-SEARCH *2  
Programme search • OFF  
• ON  
:
:
Activates Programme Search, [9].  
Cancels.  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
• ON  
• OFF  
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.  
Cancels.  
TEL MUTING  
Telephone muting  
• MUTING 1/  
MUTING 2  
• MUTING OFF  
:
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular  
phone.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL *4  
Scroll  
• ONCE  
• AUTO  
• OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
2
*
*
*
Only for FM RDS stations.  
Depends on the amplifier gain control.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Continued on the next page  
3
4
15  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
TAG DISPLAY  
Tag display  
• TAG ON  
• TAG OFF  
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [12].  
Cancels.  
:
:
:
:
:
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
• LOW POWER  
• HIGH POWER  
• AUTO  
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the  
speaker is less than 50 W to avoid them from damaging the speaker.)  
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
IF BAND  
Intermediate  
frequency band  
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noise between  
close stations. (The stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to the interference noise from adjacent stations, but the  
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.  
• WIDE  
Other external component operations  
You can connect an external component to the  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
Portable audio player, etc  
page 13.)  
3.5 mm stereo mini  
plug (not supplied)  
To check the other information while  
listening to an external component  
~
AUX IN Ô Clock  
• You can also select “AUX IN” as the playback  
source by pressing the SRC (source) button.  
16  
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
KD-G447 can be remotely controlled as instructed here  
(with an optionally purchased remote controller). We  
recommend that you use remote controller RM-RK50  
with your unit.  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.  
Warning:  
3
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or  
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as the dashboard) exposed to direct  
sunlight for a long time; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid the risk of accidents.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
4
5
SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
17  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
More about this unit  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• By pressing SRC or AUX on the unit, you can also turn  
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also  
starts.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA  
formats.  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as  
those which are detected first if a disc includes both  
audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on  
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for  
the following reasons:  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
FM RDS operations  
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of  
RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF  
(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without  
receiving these data correctly, Network-Tracking  
Reception will not operate correctly.  
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby  
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to  
the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower  
than the preset level.  
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated  
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is  
also activated automatically.  
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit  
<http://www.rds.org.uk>.  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
18  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 255  
folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB device  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
• While playing from a USB device, the playback order  
may differ from other players.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some USB  
devices or some files due to their characteristics or  
recording conditions.  
• Depending on the shape of the USB devices and  
connection ports, some USB devices may not be  
attached properly or the connection might be loose.  
• Connect one USB mass storage class device to the unit  
at a time. Do not use a USB hub.  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
– Bit rate of WMA: 16 kbps — 32 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 22.05 kHz)  
32 kbps — 320 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 48 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)  
• If the connected USB device does not have the correct  
files, “NO FILE” appears.  
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
Continued on the next page  
19  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate of MP3: 16 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency of MP3:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5)  
– Bit rate of WMA:  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops.  
Next time you select the same source again, playback  
starts from where it has been stopped previously.  
Ejecting a disc or removing a USB device  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust.  
• After ejecting a disc or removing a USB device,  
“NO DISC” or “NO USB“ appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,  
reattach a USB device, or press SRC to select another  
playback source.  
16 kbps — 32 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 22.05 kHz)  
32 kbps — 320 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)  
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
• The maximum number of characters for:  
– Folder names : 25 characters  
General settings—PSM  
– File names : 25 characters  
– MP3 Tag : 128 characters  
– WMA Tag : 64 characters  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOLUME 30.”  
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files, 255  
folders (999 files per folder), and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit does not support SD card reader.  
• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating  
is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.  
• USB devices equipped with special functions such as  
data security functions cannot be used with the unit.  
• Do not use a USB device with 2 or more partitions.  
• This unit may not recognized a USB device connected  
through a USB card reader.  
Available characters on the display  
Available characters  
Display indications  
• This unit may not play back files in a USB device  
properly when using a USB extension cord.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
20  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
To keep discs clean  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
Connectors  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Center holder  
Sticker and  
sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
Unusual shape  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
21  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 3).  
Store stations manually.  
Connect the aerial firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which  
you used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 11).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file  
names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
22  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you  
have intended.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display Roman alphabets (upper case),  
album name).  
Cyrillic alphabets (upper case), numbers, and a limited  
number of symbols (see page 20).  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to  
another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or  
<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• “READING” keeps flashing on the display.  
• Readout time varies depending on the USB device.  
• Do not use too many hierarchy, folders, and empty  
folders*.  
• Turn off the power then on again.  
• Reattach the USB device again.  
* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains  
data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.  
• Tracks/folders are not played back in the  
order you have intended.  
The playback order is determined by the write-in time  
stamp. The first track/folder written into the USB device  
will be the first track/folder for playback.  
• “NO FILE” flashes on the display.  
• “NO USB” appears on the display.  
• The unit cannot detect the USB device.  
• Attach a USB device that contains tracks encoded in an  
appropriate format.  
• Reattach the USB device again.  
• “READ” and “FAILED” appear alternately on The total number of tracks could not be accessed properly.  
the display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.  
album name).  
This unit can only display Roman alphabets (upper case),  
Cyrillic alphabets (upper case), numbers, and a limited  
number of symbols (see page 20).  
• While playing a track, sound is sometimes  
interrupted.  
The MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into  
the USB device.  
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB device, and try  
again.  
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
23  
Specifications  
Maximum Power  
Output:  
Front/Rear:  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Continuous Power  
Output (RMS):  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to  
20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total  
harmonic distortion  
Load Impedance:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
Tone Control Range: Bass:  
Middle:  
12 dB at 1 kHz  
Treble:  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
Frequency Response:  
Signal to Noise Ratio:  
Other Terminals:  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
70 dB  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, USB input jack  
Frequency Range:  
FM1/FM2:  
FM3:  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
65.00 MHz to 74.00 MHZ  
AM:  
MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz  
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz  
FM Tuner:  
Usable Sensitivity:  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:  
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB  
Frequency Response:  
Stereo Separation:  
Sensitivity/Selectivity:  
Sensitivity:  
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
30 dB  
MW Tuner:  
LW Tuner:  
20 μV/35 dB  
50 μV  
24  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)  
Number of Channels:  
Frequency Response:  
Dynamic Range:  
2 channels (stereo)  
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Wow and Flutter:  
98 dB  
Less than measurable limit  
320 kbps  
MP3 Decoding Format:  
(MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
Max. Bit Rate:  
WMA (Windows Media® Max. Bit Rate:  
Audio) Decoding Format:  
320 kbps  
USB Standard:  
USB 1.1, USB 2.0  
Max. 12 Mbps  
Data Transfer Rate (Full Speed):  
Storage:  
Less than 8 GB (1 partition type)  
Mass storage class (except HDD)  
FAT 32/16/12  
Compatible Device:  
Compatible File System:  
Playable Audio Format:  
Max. Current:  
MP3/WMA  
500 mA  
Power Requirement:  
Operating Voltage:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating Temperature:  
Dimensions (W × H × D): Installation Size (approx.):  
Panel Size (approx.):  
0°C to +40°C  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
188 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
Mass (approx.):  
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
25  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Затруднения при эксплуатации?  
Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство  
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства  
обратитесь на соответствующую страницу  
Маєте ПРОБЛЕМУ з функціонуванням?  
Повторно налаштуйте систему  
Див. сторінку “Як повторно налаштувати пристрій”  
Bіктор Компані оф Джепен Лімітед  
12, 3-чоме, Морійя-чо, Канагава-ку, Йокогама, Канагава 221-8520, Японія  
EN, RU, UK  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1107DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-G447/KD-G357  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Руководство по установке/подключению  
Керівництво зі встановлення та з’єднання  
1107DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, RU, UK  
GET0543-002A  
[EE]  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ENGLISH  
РУССКИЙ  
УКРАЇНА  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground  
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a  
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.  
Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В  
постоянного напряжения с минусом на массе. Если Ваш  
автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор  
напряжения, который может быть приобретен у дилера  
автомобилнего специалиста JVC.  
Цей пристрій призначений для роботи під напругою 12 В  
постійного струму; з електричними системами, що мають  
заземлення ВІД’ЄМНОГО полюсу. Якщо ваше авто не  
оснащене такою системою, потрібно використовувати інвертор  
напруги, який можна придбати у дилерів устаткування JVC для  
автомобілів.  
WARNINGS  
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ  
ПОПЕРЕДЖЕННЯ  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the  
Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем  
Для запобігання коротким замиканням рекомендується  
перед встановленням пристрою відключити від’ємну клему  
акумулятора та виконати усі електричні з’єднання.  
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before Вам отсоединить отрицательный разъем аккумулятора и  
installing the unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after  
installation.  
осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.  
• После установки обязательно заземлите данное  
устройство на шасси автомобиля.  
• Переконайтеся у тому, що після закінчення встановлення  
пристрою, виконано його заземлення на шасі авто.  
Notes:  
Примечания:  
Примітки:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows  
frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power  
of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an  
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from  
being damaged (see page 16 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads  
with insulating tape.  
• Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем  
указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком  
часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.  
• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной  
мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели  
устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω). Если  
максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в  
режим “AMP GAIN”, чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.  
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 16).  
• Для предотвращения коротких замыканий обмотайте  
терминалы НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫХ проводов изоляционной  
лентой.  
• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.  
Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.  
• Заміняти запобіжник можна тільки запобіжником із вказаними  
у специфікації номінальними характеристиками. Якщо  
запобіжники часто виходять з ладу, проконсультуйтеся з  
дилером устаткування JVC для автомобілів.  
• Рекомендується підключати гучномовці з максимальною  
потужністю, що перевищує 50 Вт (як для розташованих  
спереду, так і для тих, що розміщуються позаду.  
Рекомендований діапазон опору: від 4 до 8 Ом). У разі, якщо  
потужність є меншою чим 50 Вт, змініть налаштування  
“AMP GAIN” (коефіцієнт підсилення) задля запобігання  
пошкодженню гучномовців (див. стор. 16 “ІНСТРУКЦІЇ”).  
• Для запобігання коротким замиканням, заізолюйте клеми  
провідника, ЩО НЕ ВИКОРИСТОВУЄТЬСЯ, ізоляційною  
стрічкою.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it  
when removing this unit.  
• По закінчені роботи радіатор стає надто гарячим. Будьте  
обережні, не торкайтесь його при видалені цього пристрою.  
Heat sink  
Радиатор  
Радіатор  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit.  
If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.  
Список деталей для установки и  
Перелік деталей для встановлення та з’єднання  
У комплекті з цим пристроєм надаються такі деталі.  
Якщо будь-яка з цих деталей відсутня, негайно зверніться до  
дилера устаткування JVC для автомобілів.  
подключения  
Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством.  
При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с  
дилером автомобильного специалиста JVC.  
A / B  
Hard case/Control panel  
Жесткий футляр/панель управления  
Жорсткий футляр/Панель управління  
C
D
Sleeve  
Муфта  
Екран  
Trim plate  
Декоративную панель  
Знімна пластина  
G
E
F
Lock nut (M5)  
Фиксирующая гайка (M5)  
Стопорна гайка (М5)  
Power cord  
Кабель питания  
Шнур живлення  
Washer (ø5)  
Шайба (њ5)  
Шайба (ø5)  
I
H
J
Rubber cushion  
Резиновый чехол  
Гумова прокладка  
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
Крепежный болт (M4 × 5 мм; M5 × 12.5 мм)  
Монтажний болт (M4 × 5 мм; M5 × 12.5 мм)  
Handles  
Рычаги  
Ручки  
1
INSTALLATION  
ВСТАНОВЛЕННЯ  
УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В  
ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)  
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
(МОНТАЖ НА ПРИЛАДОВУ ПАНЕЛЬ)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have  
any questions or require information regarding installation kits,  
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company  
supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed  
by a qualified technician.  
Наведена нижче ілюстрація демонструє типовий процес  
встановлення. У разі будь яких запитань або потреби у  
інформації щодо набору інструментів та спорядження,  
проконсультуйтеся з дилером устаткування JVC для автомобілів  
або з компанією, що постачає набір інструментів та спорядження.  
• Якщо ви не впевнені щодо правильності встановлення цього  
пристрою, залучіть до його встановлення кваліфікованого  
спеціаліста.  
На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка.  
Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, касающиеся установки,  
обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста  
JVC или в компанию, поставляющую соответствующие  
принадлежности.  
• Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это  
устройство, обратитесь к квалифицированному специалисту.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Выполните необходимые подключения  
контактов, как показано на оборотной  
стороне этой инструкции.  
Виконайте потрібні електричні  
з’єднання.  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Отогните соответствующие  
фиксаторы, предназначенные для  
прочной установки корпуса.  
Зігніть відповідні фіксатори для  
надійного встановлення екрану на  
його місці.  
Removing the unit  
Удаление устройства  
Видалення пристрою  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.  
Перед видаленням пристрою, ослабте кріплення тильної частини.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните их,  
как показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть  
устройство.  
Вставте дві ручки, а потім потягніть їх на  
себе згідно з ілюстрацією, щоби витягти  
пристрій.  
When using the optional stay / При использовании  
дополнительной стойки / Використання додаткової  
стійки (постачається за окремим замовленням)  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / При установке устройства  
без использования муфты / Встановлення пристрою без екрану  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите  
устройство на место.  
У таких авто, як, наприклад, “Тойота”, спершу зніміть радіоприймач, а на його місце встановіть пристрій.  
Fire wall  
Стена  
Вогнестійка стінка  
Stay (option)  
Стойка (дополнительно)  
Стійка (на замовлення)  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Болты с плоской головкой (M5 × 8 мм)*2  
Гвинти з пласкими голівками (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Dashboard  
Приборная панель  
Приладова панель  
Bracket*2  
Кронштейн*2  
Кронштейн*2  
Screw (option)  
Винт (дополнительно)  
Гвинт (на замовлення)  
Pocket  
Карман  
Карман  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Bracket*2  
Болты с плоской головкой (M5 × 8 мм)*2  
Кронштейн*2  
Гвинти з пласкими голівками (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Кронштейн*2  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If  
longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.  
Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.  
Встановіть пристрій під кутом меншим, ніж 30˚.  
8 мм. При использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.  
: Встановлюючи пристрій на монтажні кронштейни, переконайтеся, що застосовуються  
Примітка  
гвинти довжиною 8 мм. Якщо гвинти довші, вони можуть пошкодити пристрій.  
1
2
1
1
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the  
rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
При встановленні пристрою, будьте обережні, не пошкодьте  
запобіжник, розташований у тильній частині.  
Не входить до комплекту постачання цього пристрою.  
*
*
Устанавливайте устройство таким образом, чтобы не повредить  
предохранитель, расположенный сзади.  
Не входят в комплект.  
2
2
*
2
РУССКИЙ  
УКРАЇНА  
ENGLISH  
ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
ЕЛЕКТРИЧНІ З’ЄДНАННЯ  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker  
connections:  
ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и  
подключению громкоговорителей:  
ЗАСТЕРЕЖЕННЯ щодо приєднання джерела  
живлення та гучномовців:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к  
• НЕ з’єднуйте провідники живлення гучномовців з  
акумулятором. Невиконання такої вимоги призведе до  
тяжкого ушкодження пристрою.  
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the  
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.  
аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе устройство будет  
повреждено.  
• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей к кабелю • ПЕРЕД тим, як з’єднати провідники живлення з  
питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему соединений  
громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.  
гучномовцями, перевірте схему з’єднання гучномовців  
вашого авто.  
A
If your car is equipped with the ISO connector / Если автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO / Якщо ваше авто оснащене розніманням за  
стандартом ISO  
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.  
• Приєднайте рознімання ISO, як рекомендовано на ілюстрації.  
• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.  
From the car body  
От корпуса автомобиля  
Від корпусу авто  
A
C
B
D
E
F
G
H
ISO connector of the supplied power cord  
Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в  
комплект поставки  
Рознімання ISO шнура живлення, що  
входить до комплекту постачання  
I
J
L
K
M
O
N
P
View from the lead side  
Вид со стороны выводов  
Вид зі сторони електричних виводів  
For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobiles / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi или Opel (Vauxhall) / Для деяких авто марки  
VW/Audi або Opel (Vauxhall)  
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as  
illustrated.  
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.  
Вам, можливо, прийдеться внести зміни до з’єднання  
провідників шнура живлення згідно з ілюстрацією.  
• Перед тим, як встановлювати цей пристрій, зв’яжіться з  
уповноваженим дилером вашого авто.  
Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для  
прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.  
• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному  
агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.  
Modified wiring 1 / Преобразованная схема соединений 1 / Змінена схема з’єднання рознімань 1  
Original wiring / Исходная схема соединений / Початкова схема з’єднання рознімань  
ISO connector  
Разъем ISO  
Рознімання ISO  
Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.  
Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную схему соединений 2.  
Якщо пристрій не включається, скористуйтеся зміненою схемою з’єднання рознімань 2.  
Y: Yellow  
Желтый  
Жовтий  
R: Red  
Красный  
Червоний  
Modified wiring 2 / Преобразованная схема соединений 2 / Змінена схема з’єднання рознімань 2  
3
B
Connections without using the ISO connector / Подключение без использования разъема ISO / З’єднання без допомоги з’єднувача ISO  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.  
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.  
body may be different in color.  
Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте  
проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное подключение может  
Перед тим, як з’єднати: Уважно перевірте електричну  
схему з’єднання вашого авто Неправильне з’єднання може  
спричинити тяжке пошкодження вашого пристрою.  
Контакти шнура живлення та рознімання, яке йде від корпуса  
авто можуть мати різні кольори.  
Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова  
автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.  
1 Cut the ISO connector.  
1 Від’єднайте рознімання ISO.  
1 Обрежьте разъем ISO.  
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order  
2 З’єднайте кольорові провідники шнура живлення у порядку,  
2 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в указанном  
specified in the illustration below.  
що наведений нижче на ілюстрації.  
ниже порядке.  
3 Connect the aerial cord.  
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3 Приєднайте провід антени.  
3 Подключите кабель антенны.  
4
Виконайте кінцеве приєднання джгута провідників до пристрою.  
4
В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к устройству.  
Rear ground terminal  
Задний разъем заземления  
Тильна клема заземлення  
Aerial terminal  
Разъем антенны  
Рознімання антени  
15 A fuse  
Предохранитель 15 A  
Запобіжник 15 А  
Ignition switch  
Переключатель зажигания  
Перемикач запалювання  
Black  
Черный  
Чорний  
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля  
На металічний корпус або на шасі авто  
Yellow*2  
Желтый*2  
Жовтий*2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)  
(постоянный 12 В)  
На клему фази у блоці запобіжників для з’єднання з акумулятором  
авто (обминаючи перемикач запалення)—постійний струм 12 В  
Red  
Красный  
Червоний  
Fuse block  
Блок предохранителя  
Блок запобіжників  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя  
На допоміжну клему у блоці запобіжників  
Blue with white stripe  
Синий с белой полосой  
Синій із білою смужкою  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any  
(200 mA max.)  
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны  
(макс. 200 мА)  
На провідник зовнішнього пристрою іншого обладнання або  
на антену (якщо встановлена) (максимальний струм 200 мА)  
Brown  
Коричневый  
To cellular phone system  
К системе сотового телефона  
Коричневий  
На систему стільникового телефону  
Purple with black stripe  
Пурпурный с черной  
полосой  
Пурпурний з чорною  
смужкою  
White with black stripe  
Белый с черной полосой  
Білий з чорною смужкою  
White  
Белый  
Білий  
Gray with black stripe  
Серый с черной полосой  
Сірий з чорною смужкою  
Gray  
Green with black stripe  
Green  
Зеленый  
Зелений  
Purple  
Пурпурный  
Пурпурний  
Серый  
Зеленый с черной полосой  
Сірий  
Зелений з чорною смужкою  
Right speaker (rear)  
Правый громкоговоритель  
(задний)  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Левый громкоговоритель (передний)  
Лівий гучномовець (передній)  
Правый громкоговоритель (передний)  
Правий гучномовець (передній)  
Левый громкоговоритель (задний)  
Лівий гучномовець (задній)  
Правий гучномовець  
(задній)  
1
2
1
1
*
*
Не входит в комплект.  
Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот провод,  
иначе питание не включится.  
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead  
must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.  
*
*
Не входить до комплекту постачання цього пристрою.  
2
2
Перед тим, як перевірити працездатність цього виробу до його  
встановлення, цей контакт необхідно приєднати, інакше живлення  
на прилад подаватися не буде.  
BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
НЕСПРАВНОСТІ  
• Сработал предохранитель.  
• The fuse blows.  
• Вийшов з ладу запобіжник.  
* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Чи правильно приєднані червоний та чорний провідники?  
• Питание не включается.  
* Подключен ли желтый провод?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
• Не можна включити живлення.  
* Чи приєднаний жовтий провідник?  
• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.  
* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода  
громкоговорителей?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• Звук з гучномовців відсутній.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* Чи не замкнуто “на коротко” вихідні провідники гучномовця?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Звук спотворений.  
• Звук искажен.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Чи не заземлені вихідні провідники гучномовця?  
* Чи заземлені разом провідники “–” лівого та правого  
гучномовця?  
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?  
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)  
громкоговорителей?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using  
shorter and thicker cords?  
• Звук чути з перешкодами.  
* Чи приєднано тильну клему заземлення до шасі авто за  
допомогою коротших та товстіших шнурів?  
• Шум мешает звучанию.  
* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси  
автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
• Пристрій нагрівається.  
• Устройство нагревается.  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Чи не заземлені вихідні провідники гучномовця?  
* Чи заземлені разом провідники “–” лівого та правого  
гучномовця?  
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?  
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)  
громкоговорителей?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Цей пристрій не працює взагалі.  
* Чи ви переналаштовували пристрій?  
• Приемник не работает.  
* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?  
4
CD RECEIVER  
KD-G644  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0503-001A  
[UI]  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to reset your unit  
[European Union only]  
Warning:  
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Caution on volume setting:  
Digital devices (CD/USB) produce very little noise  
compared with other sources. Lower the volume  
before playing these digital sources to avoid  
damaging the speakers by sudden increase of the  
output level.  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
2
How to use the M MODE button  
CONTENTS  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons will work  
as different function buttons.  
Control panel ..................................  
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........  
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
6
6
Radio operations .............................  
7
Disc/USB device operations ..............  
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................  
Playing from a USB device....................................  
8
8
8
To use these buttons for their original functions  
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds  
without pressing any of these buttons until the  
functions mode is cleared, or press M MODE again.  
Sound adjustments.......................... 11  
General settings — PSM .................. 12  
Other external component  
operations ................................... 14  
Detaching the control panel  
Title assignment.............................. 14  
Maintenance ................................... 15  
More about this unit ........................ 16  
Troubleshooting.............................. 19  
Specifications.................................. 21  
Attaching the control panel  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
3
Control panel  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons  
2 0 (eject) button  
o
;
a
s
d
f
Number buttons  
RPT (repeat) button  
RND (random) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
USB (Universal Serial Bus) input jack  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Time countdown indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer) indicators  
—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ, ROCK, POPS, USER  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
3
4
5
(standby/on attenuator) button  
Control dial  
Remote sensor  
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
BAND button  
Loading slot  
Display window  
EQ (equalizer) button  
DISP (display) button  
(control panel release) button  
SRC (source) button  
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
g
h
j
k
l
e 4 /¢ buttons  
r
t
y
u
i
AUX (auxiliary) button  
SEL (select) button  
M MODE button  
MO (monaural) button  
/
z
x
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (folder), (track/file)  
Main display  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
c
4
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Warning:  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or  
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as the dashboard) exposed to direct  
sunlight for a long time; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid the risk of accidents.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar  
tools.  
3
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
4
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
5
SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
5
Basic settings  
Getting started  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 12 and  
13.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
* You cannot select these sources if they are not  
ready or not connected.  
Select “CLOCK HOUR,” then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK MIN” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
! For FM/AM tuner  
3
Finish the procedure.  
⁄ Adjust the volume.  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Clock time is shown on the display for  
about 5 seconds. See also page 13.  
Volume level appears.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 11 and 12.)  
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound, press the  
button again.  
To turn off the power  
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Ÿ
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
! Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
2
3
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
Continued on the next page  
7
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.50MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
Disc / USB device  
operations  
1
2
: For built-in CD player operations.  
: For external USB device operations.  
Playing a disc in the unit  
3
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Listening to a preset station  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the  
source or eject the disc.  
1
To stop play and eject the disc  
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
or  
Playing from a USB device  
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB  
device (except HDD).  
All tracks in the USB device will be played repeatedly  
until you change the source.  
To check the other information while  
listening to an FM or AM station  
USB input jack  
~
Frequency = Clock =  
Station name* = (back to the  
beginning)  
* If no title is assigned to a station, “NO NAME” appears.  
To assign a title to a station, see page 14.  
8
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous track  
Ÿ
USB memory  
If a USB device has been attached...  
To go to the next or previous folder (for  
MP3/WMA)  
Playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• If a different USB device is currently attached,  
playback starts from the beginning.  
To detach the USB device, straightly pull it out from  
the unit.  
• Removing the USB device will also stop playback.  
Then, press SRC to listen to another playback source.  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA) directly  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
Cautions:  
• Avoid using the USB device if it might hinder your  
safety driving.  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
• Do not pull out or attach the USB device  
repeatedly while “READING” appears on the  
display.  
• Do not start a car engine if a USB device is  
connected.  
• This unit may not be able to play the files  
depending on the type of the USB device.  
• Operation and power supply may not work as  
intended for some USB devices.  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA, it is  
required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3/WMA):  
• You cannot connect a computer to the USB input  
jack of the unit.  
• Make sure all important data has been backed up  
to avoid losing the data.  
• Do not leave a USB device in the car, expose to  
direct sunlight, or high temperature to avoid  
deformation or cause damage to the USB device.  
• Some USB devices may not work immediately  
after you turn on the power.  
• For more details about USB operations, see pages  
17 and 18.  
9
Other main functions  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or CD Text  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3/WMA, you can skip tracks within the same  
folder  
A = Disc title/performer*1 = Track  
title*1 [ ] = B = (back to the beginning)  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
While playing an MP3/WMA disc or  
USB device  
1
• When “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 13)  
2
A = Album name/performer (folder  
name*2) [  
name*2) [  
beginning)  
] = Track title (file  
] = B = (back to the  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
• When “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF”  
3
A = Folder name [ ] = File name  
[
] = B = (back to the beginning)  
A
B
:
:
Clock with the current track number  
The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
2
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
10  
Selecting the playback modes  
Sound adjustments  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
Preset values  
BAS MID TRE LOUD  
Indication (For)  
7
USER  
(Flat sound)  
00  
00 00 OFF  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
TRACK RPT  
:
The current track. [  
]
+03 00 +02 OFF  
+01 00 +03 OFF  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 OFF  
+03 00 +03 OFF  
FOLDER RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.  
[
]
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
RPT OFF  
:
Cancels.  
7
Random play  
POPS  
(Light music)  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
Mode  
Plays at random  
FOLDER RND * : All tracks of the current folder,  
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
then the tracks of the next folder  
and so on. [  
]
ALL RND  
RND OFF  
:
:
All tracks of the current disc or  
BAS: Bass MID: Mid-range TRE: Treble LOUD: Loudness  
USB device. [  
Cancels.  
]
* Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/USB).  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the  
display  
1
* Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W”  
(see page 13).  
2
Continued on the next page  
11  
Indication, [Range]  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
BASS *1, [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
listed in the table on page 13.  
MIDDLE *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
1
TREBLE *1, [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
2
Select a PSM item.  
FADER *2, [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.  
BALANCE *3, [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.  
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
LOUD *4 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.  
SUB.W*5, [00 to 08, initial: 04]  
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
Adjust the subwoofer output level.  
VOL ADJ (volume adjust), [–05 to +05, initial: 00]  
Adjust the volume level of each source (except FM), in  
relation to the FM volume level. The volume level will  
automatically increase or decrease when you change  
the source.  
Finish the procedure.  
• Before making an adjustment, select the source you  
want to adjust.  
VOLUME, [00 to 50 or 00 to 30] *6  
Adjust the volume.  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the  
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently  
selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.  
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be  
applied to all sound modes.  
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W”  
(see page 13).  
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 13 for details.)  
2
*
3
4
*
*
5
6
*
*
12  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
DEMO  
Display  
demonstration  
• DEMO ON  
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
• DEMO OFF  
:
:
CLOCK DISP *1  
• CLOCK ON  
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is  
Clock display  
turned off.  
• CLOCK OFF : Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds  
when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK HOUR  
Hour adjustment  
1 – 12  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]  
CLOCK MIN  
Minute adjustment  
00 – 59  
• AUTO  
DIMMER  
:
Dims the display and button illumination when you turn on the  
Dimmer  
headlights.  
• ON  
• OFF  
:
:
Activates dimmer.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL *2  
Scroll  
• ONCE  
• AUTO  
• OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
L/O MODE  
Line output mode  
• REAR  
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the  
speakers (through an external amplifier).  
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a  
subwoofer (through an external amplifier).  
• SUB.W  
SUB.W FREQ*3  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
• LOW  
• MID  
• HIGH  
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
TAG DISPLAY  
Tag display  
• TAG ON  
• TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain  
control  
•
LOW POWER  
:
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the  
speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speaker.)  
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
•
HIGH POWER  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select  
“CLOCK OFF” that you save the car’s battery.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”  
2
3
*
*
13  
Other external component Title assignment  
operations  
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and  
AM) and up to 8 characters for each station name.  
You can connect an external component to the  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
1
2
Select FM/AM.  
Show the title entry screen.  
Portable audio player, etc  
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
(not supplied)  
3
Assign a title.  
1
Select a character.  
~
• You can also select “AUX IN” as the playback  
source by pressing the SRC (source) button.  
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character  
position.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish  
entering the title.  
4
Finish the procedure.  
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 11 and 12.)  
To erase the entire title  
In step 2 above...  
To check the other information while  
listening to an external component  
Clock Ô AUX IN  
14  
To keep discs clean  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Connectors  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
Center holder  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Sticker and  
sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
Unusual shape  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
15  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
• By pressing SRC or AUX on the unit, you can also turn  
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also  
starts.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as  
those which are detected first if a disc includes both  
audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on  
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for  
the following reasons:  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc,  
disc play will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
• During SSM search...  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA  
formats.  
16  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB device  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• While playing from a USB device, the playback order  
may differ from other players.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some USB  
devices or some files due to their characteristics or  
recording conditions.  
– Bit rate of WMA: 16 kbps — 32 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 22.05 kHz)  
• Depending on the shape of the USB devices and  
connection ports, some USB devices may not be  
attached properly or the connection might be loose.  
• Connect one USB mass storage class device to the unit  
at a time. Do not use a USB hub.  
32 kbps — 320 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 48 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
• If the connected USB device does not have the correct  
files, “NO FILE” appears.  
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate of MP3: 16 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency of MP3:  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 255  
folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5)  
– Bit rate of WMA:  
16 kbps — 32 kbps  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
(Sampling frequency: 22.05 kHz)  
32 kbps — 320 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)  
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
Continued on the next page  
17  
• The maximum number of characters for:  
– Folder names : 25 characters  
– File names : 25 characters  
– MP3 Tag : 128 characters  
– WMA Tag : 64 characters  
General settings—PSM  
• “AUTO” setting for “DIMMER” may not work correctly  
on some vehicles, particularly on those having a  
control dial for dimming.  
In this case, change the “DIMMER” setting to any  
other than “AUTO.”  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOLUME 30.”  
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files, 255  
folders (999 files per folder), and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit does not support SD card reader.  
• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating  
is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.  
• USB devices equipped with special functions such as  
data security functions cannot be used with the unit.  
• Do not use a USB device with 2 or more partitions.  
• This unit may not recognized a USB device connected  
through a USB card reader.  
• This unit may not play back files in a USB device  
properly when using a USB extension cord.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station  
frequencies, “NAMEFULL” appears. Delete unwanted  
titles before assignment.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops.  
Next time you select the same source again, playback  
starts from where it has been stopped previously.  
Ejecting a disc or removing a USB device  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust.  
• After ejecting a disc or removing a USB device,  
“NO DISC” or “NO USB“ appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,  
reattach a USB device, or press SRC to select another  
playback source.  
18  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
•
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you  
used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and ”EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file  
names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
Continued on the next page  
19  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you  
have intended.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
album name).  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to  
another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or  
<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• “READING” keeps flashing on the display.  
• Readout time varies depending on the USB device.  
• Do not use too many hierarchy, folders, and empty  
folders*.  
• Turn off the power then on again.  
• Reattach the USB device again.  
* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains  
data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.  
• Tracks/folders are not played back in the  
order you have intended.  
The playback order is determined by the write-in time  
stamp. The first track/folder written into the USB device  
will be the first track/folder for playback.  
• “NO FILE” flashes on the display.  
• “NO USB” appears on the display.  
• The unit cannot detect the USB device.  
• Attach a USB device that contains tracks encoded in an  
appropriate format.  
• Reattach the USB device again.  
• “READ” and “FAILED” appear alternately on The total number of tracks could not be accessed properly.  
the display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.  
album name).  
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• While playing a track, sound is sometimes  
interrupted.  
The MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into  
the USB device.  
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB device, and try  
again.  
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
20  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more  
than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
12 dB at 1 kHz  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
Mid-range:  
Treble:  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
USB SECTION  
USB Standard:  
USB 1.1, USB 2.0  
Max. 12 Mbps  
Line-Out Level/  
Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Data Transfer Rate  
(Full Speed):  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Storage:  
Less than 8 GB (1 partition type)  
Mass storage class (except HDD)  
Subwoofer-Out Level/ 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Impedance:  
Compatible Device:  
Other Terminal:  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, USB  
input jack  
Compatible File System: FAT 32/16/12  
Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA  
Max. Current:  
500 mA  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
AM:  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Grounding System:  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity:  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature:  
Alternate Channel  
65 dB  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Installation Size:  
Panel Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm  
Stereo Separation:  
30 dB  
Mass:  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
AM Tuner  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
21  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
EN  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1107DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-G644  
Installation/Connection Manual  
1107DTSMDTJEIN  
EN  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0503-002A  
[UI]  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
Notes:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and  
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP  
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Heat sink  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold  
the sleeve firmly in place.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer immediately.  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
A / B  
Hard case/Control panel  
C
Sleeve  
D
E
Trim plate  
Power cord  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
F
G
Washer (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
When using the optional stay  
When installing the unit without  
using the sleeve  
Stay (option)  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car  
radio and install the unit in its place.  
Fire wall  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
H
I
Dashboard  
Mounting bolt  
Rubber cushion  
Bracket*2  
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
Screw (option)  
Pocket  
Flat head screws  
(M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Bracket*2  
Note:  
When installing the unit on the mounting  
bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws.  
If longer screws are used, they could damage the  
unit.  
Install the unit at an  
angle of less than 30˚.  
J
K
L
Handles  
Remote controller  
Battery  
1
2
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
1
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
A Typical connections  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
Line out (see diagram  
)
Rear ground terminal  
Antenna terminal  
15 A fuse  
Ignition switch  
Black  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
Yellow *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Red  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Fuse block  
Blue  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
Blue with white stripe  
Orange with white stripe  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
To car light control switch  
White with black stripe  
White  
Gray with black stripe  
Gray  
Green with black stripe  
Green  
Purple with black stripe  
Purple  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer  
B
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Front speakers  
JVC Amplifier  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
To the remote lead of other  
equipment or automatic antenna  
if any  
Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W” (See page  
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 13  
13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
You can also connect a subwoofer to the  
REAR LINE OUT terminals.  
of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
You can connect a power amplifier for  
rear speakers.  
Rear speakers  
Subwoofer  
or  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Amplifier  
Front speakers  
1
2
3
4
5
*
*
*
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot be turned on.  
Remote lead  
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
2
CD RECEIVER  
KD-G646/KD-G645  
KD-G646/KD-G645  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0502-001A  
[U/UH]  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to reset your unit  
[European Union only]  
Warning:  
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Caution on volume setting:  
Digital devices (CD/USB) produce very little noise  
compared with other sources. Lower the volume  
before playing these digital sources to avoid  
damaging the speakers by sudden increase of the  
output level.  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
2
How to use the M MODE button  
CONTENTS  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons will work  
as different function buttons.  
Control panel —KD-G646/KD-G645 .......  
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........  
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
6
6
Radio operations .............................  
7
Disc/USB device operations ..............  
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................  
Playing from a USB device....................................  
8
8
8
To use these buttons for their original functions  
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds  
without pressing any of these buttons until the  
functions mode is cleared, or press M MODE again.  
Sound adjustments.......................... 11  
General settings — PSM .................. 12  
Other external component  
operations ................................... 14  
Detaching the control panel  
Title assignment.............................. 14  
Maintenance ................................... 15  
More about this unit ........................ 16  
Troubleshooting.............................. 19  
Specifications.................................. 21  
Attaching the control panel  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
The control panel illustrations used for explanation  
in this manual is of KD-G645.  
3
Control panel —  
KD-G646/KD-G645  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons  
2 0 (eject) button  
o
;
a
s
d
f
Number buttons  
RPT (repeat) button  
RND (random) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
USB (Universal Serial Bus) input jack  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Time countdown indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer) indicators  
—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ, ROCK, POPS, USER  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
3
4
5
(standby/on attenuator) button  
Control dial  
Remote sensor  
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
BAND button  
Loading slot  
Display window  
EQ (equalizer) button  
DISP (display) button  
(control panel release) button  
SRC (source) button  
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
g
h
j
k
l
e 4 /¢ buttons  
r
t
y
u
i
AUX (auxiliary) button  
SEL (select) button  
M MODE button  
MO (monaural) button  
/
z
x
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (folder), (track/file)  
Main display  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
c
4
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Warning:  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or  
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as the dashboard) exposed to direct  
sunlight for a long time; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid the risk of accidents.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar  
tools.  
3
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
4
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
5
SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
5
Basic settings  
Getting started  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 12 and  
13.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
* You cannot select these sources if they are not  
ready or not connected.  
Select “CLOCK HOUR,” then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK MIN” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
! For FM/AM tuner  
3
Finish the procedure.  
⁄ Adjust the volume.  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Clock time is shown on the display for  
about 5 seconds. See also page 13.  
Volume level appears.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 11 and 12.)  
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound, press the  
button again.  
To turn off the power  
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Ÿ
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
! Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
2
3
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
Continued on the next page  
7
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.50MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
Disc / USB device  
operations  
1
2
: For built-in CD player operations.  
: For external USB device operations.  
Playing a disc in the unit  
3
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Listening to a preset station  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the  
source or eject the disc.  
1
To stop play and eject the disc  
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
or  
Playing from a USB device  
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB  
device (except HDD).  
All tracks in the USB device will be played repeatedly  
until you change the source.  
To check the other information while  
listening to an FM or AM station  
USB input jack  
~
Frequency = Clock =  
Station name* = (back to the  
beginning)  
* If no title is assigned to a station, “NO NAME” appears.  
To assign a title to a station, see page 14.  
8
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous track  
Ÿ
USB memory  
If a USB device has been attached...  
To go to the next or previous folder (for  
MP3/WMA)  
Playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• If a different USB device is currently attached,  
playback starts from the beginning.  
To detach the USB device, straightly pull it out from  
the unit.  
• Removing the USB device will also stop playback.  
Then, press SRC to listen to another playback source.  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA) directly  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
Cautions:  
• Avoid using the USB device if it might hinder your  
safety driving.  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
• Do not pull out or attach the USB device  
repeatedly while “READING” appears on the  
display.  
• Do not start a car engine if a USB device is  
connected.  
• This unit may not be able to play the files  
depending on the type of the USB device.  
• Operation and power supply may not work as  
intended for some USB devices.  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA, it is  
required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3/WMA):  
• You cannot connect a computer to the USB input  
jack of the unit.  
• Make sure all important data has been backed up  
to avoid losing the data.  
• Do not leave a USB device in the car, expose to  
direct sunlight, or high temperature to avoid  
deformation or cause damage to the USB device.  
• Some USB devices may not work immediately  
after you turn on the power.  
• For more details about USB operations, see pages  
17 and 18.  
9
Other main functions  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or CD Text  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3/WMA, you can skip tracks within the same  
folder  
A = Disc title/performer*1 = Track  
title*1 [ ] = B = (back to the beginning)  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
While playing an MP3/WMA disc or  
USB device  
1
• When “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 13)  
2
A = Album name/performer (folder  
name*2) [  
name*2) [  
beginning)  
] = Track title (file  
] = B = (back to the  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
• When “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF”  
3
A = Folder name [ ] = File name  
[
] = B = (back to the beginning)  
A
B
:
:
Clock with the current track number  
The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
2
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
10  
Selecting the playback modes  
Sound adjustments  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
Preset values  
BAS MID TRE LOUD  
Indication (For)  
7
USER  
(Flat sound)  
00  
00 00 OFF  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
TRACK RPT  
:
The current track. [  
]
+03 00 +02 OFF  
+01 00 +03 OFF  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 OFF  
+03 00 +03 OFF  
FOLDER RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.  
[
]
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
RPT OFF  
:
Cancels.  
7
Random play  
POPS  
(Light music)  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
Mode  
Plays at random  
FOLDER RND * : All tracks of the current folder,  
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
then the tracks of the next folder  
and so on. [  
]
ALL RND  
RND OFF  
:
:
All tracks of the current disc or  
BAS: Bass MID: Mid-range TRE: Treble LOUD: Loudness  
USB device. [  
Cancels.  
]
* Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/USB).  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the  
display  
1
* Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W”  
(see page 13).  
2
Continued on the next page  
11  
Indication, [Range]  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
BASS *1, [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
listed in the table on page 13.  
MIDDLE *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
1
TREBLE *1, [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
2
Select a PSM item.  
FADER *2, [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.  
BALANCE *3, [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.  
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
LOUD *4 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.  
SUB.W*5, [00 to 08, initial: 04]  
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
Adjust the subwoofer output level.  
VOL ADJ (volume adjust), [–05 to +05, initial: 00]  
Adjust the volume level of each source (except FM), in  
relation to the FM volume level. The volume level will  
automatically increase or decrease when you change  
the source.  
Finish the procedure.  
• Before making an adjustment, select the source you  
want to adjust.  
VOLUME, [00 to 50 or 00 to 30] *6  
Adjust the volume.  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the  
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently  
selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.  
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be  
applied to all sound modes.  
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W”  
(see page 13).  
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 13 for details.)  
2
*
3
4
*
*
5
6
*
*
12  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
DEMO  
Display  
demonstration  
• DEMO ON  
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
• DEMO OFF  
:
:
CLOCK DISP *1  
• CLOCK ON  
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is  
Clock display  
turned off.  
• CLOCK OFF : Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds  
when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK HOUR  
Hour adjustment  
1 – 12  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]  
CLOCK MIN  
Minute adjustment  
00 – 59  
• AUTO  
DIMMER  
:
Dims the display and button illumination when you turn on the  
Dimmer  
headlights.  
• ON  
• OFF  
:
:
Activates dimmer.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL *2  
Scroll  
• ONCE  
• AUTO  
• OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
L/O MODE  
Line output mode  
• REAR  
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the  
speakers (through an external amplifier).  
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a  
subwoofer (through an external amplifier).  
• SUB.W  
SUB.W FREQ*3  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
• LOW  
• MID  
• HIGH  
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
TAG DISPLAY  
Tag display  
• TAG ON  
• TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain  
control  
•
LOW POWER  
:
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the  
speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speaker.)  
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
•
HIGH POWER  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select  
“CLOCK OFF” that you save the car’s battery.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”  
2
3
*
*
13  
Other external component Title assignment  
operations  
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and  
AM) and up to 8 characters for each station name.  
You can connect an external component to the  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
1
2
Select FM/AM.  
Show the title entry screen.  
Portable audio player, etc  
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
(not supplied)  
3
Assign a title.  
1
Select a character.  
~
• You can also select “AUX IN” as the playback  
source by pressing the SRC (source) button.  
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character  
position.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish  
entering the title.  
4
Finish the procedure.  
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 11 and 12.)  
To erase the entire title  
In step 2 above...  
To check the other information while  
listening to an external component  
Clock Ô AUX IN  
14  
To keep discs clean  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Connectors  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
Center holder  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Sticker and  
sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
Unusual shape  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
15  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
• By pressing SRC or AUX on the unit, you can also turn  
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also  
starts.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as  
those which are detected first if a disc includes both  
audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on  
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for  
the following reasons:  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc,  
disc play will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
• During SSM search...  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA  
formats.  
16  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB device  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• While playing from a USB device, the playback order  
may differ from other players.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some USB  
devices or some files due to their characteristics or  
recording conditions.  
– Bit rate of WMA: 16 kbps — 32 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 22.05 kHz)  
• Depending on the shape of the USB devices and  
connection ports, some USB devices may not be  
attached properly or the connection might be loose.  
• Connect one USB mass storage class device to the unit  
at a time. Do not use a USB hub.  
32 kbps — 320 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 48 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
• If the connected USB device does not have the correct  
files, “NO FILE” appears.  
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate of MP3: 16 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency of MP3:  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 255  
folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5)  
– Bit rate of WMA:  
16 kbps — 32 kbps  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
(Sampling frequency: 22.05 kHz)  
32 kbps — 320 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)  
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
Continued on the next page  
17  
• The maximum number of characters for:  
– Folder names : 25 characters  
– File names : 25 characters  
– MP3 Tag : 128 characters  
– WMA Tag : 64 characters  
General settings—PSM  
• “AUTO” setting for “DIMMER” may not work correctly  
on some vehicles, particularly on those having a  
control dial for dimming.  
In this case, change the “DIMMER” setting to any  
other than “AUTO.”  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOLUME 30.”  
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files, 255  
folders (999 files per folder), and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit does not support SD card reader.  
• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating  
is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.  
• USB devices equipped with special functions such as  
data security functions cannot be used with the unit.  
• Do not use a USB device with 2 or more partitions.  
• This unit may not recognized a USB device connected  
through a USB card reader.  
• This unit may not play back files in a USB device  
properly when using a USB extension cord.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station  
frequencies, “NAMEFULL” appears. Delete unwanted  
titles before assignment.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops.  
Next time you select the same source again, playback  
starts from where it has been stopped previously.  
Ejecting a disc or removing a USB device  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust.  
• After ejecting a disc or removing a USB device,  
“NO DISC” or “NO USB“ appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,  
reattach a USB device, or press SRC to select another  
playback source.  
18  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
•
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you  
used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and ”EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file  
names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
Continued on the next page  
19  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you  
have intended.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
album name).  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to  
another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or  
<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• “READING” keeps flashing on the display.  
• Readout time varies depending on the USB device.  
• Do not use too many hierarchy, folders, and empty  
folders*.  
• Turn off the power then on again.  
• Reattach the USB device again.  
* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains  
data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.  
• Tracks/folders are not played back in the  
order you have intended.  
The playback order is determined by the write-in time  
stamp. The first track/folder written into the USB device  
will be the first track/folder for playback.  
• “NO FILE” flashes on the display.  
• “NO USB” appears on the display.  
• The unit cannot detect the USB device.  
• Attach a USB device that contains tracks encoded in an  
appropriate format.  
• Reattach the USB device again.  
• “READ” and “FAILED” appear alternately on The total number of tracks could not be accessed properly.  
the display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.  
album name).  
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• While playing a track, sound is sometimes  
interrupted.  
The MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into  
the USB device.  
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB device, and try  
again.  
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
20  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more  
than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
12 dB at 1 kHz  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
Mid-range:  
Treble:  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
USB SECTION  
USB Standard:  
USB 1.1, USB 2.0  
Max. 12 Mbps  
Line-Out Level/  
Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Data Transfer Rate  
(Full Speed):  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Storage:  
Less than 8 GB (1 partition type)  
Mass storage class (except HDD)  
Subwoofer-Out Level/ 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Impedance:  
Compatible Device:  
Other Terminal:  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, USB  
input jack  
Compatible File System: FAT 32/16/12  
Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA  
Max. Current:  
500 mA  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
AM:  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Grounding System:  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity:  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature:  
Alternate Channel  
65 dB  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Installation Size:  
Panel Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm  
Stereo Separation:  
30 dB  
Mass:  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
AM Tuner  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
21  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
EN, TH  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1007DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-G646/KD-G645  
Installation/Connection Manual  
°“√µ¥µß/§¡Õ°“√µ¥µß  
1007DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, TH  
GET0502-006A  
[U/UH]  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ENGLISH  
‰∑¬  
™¥ª√–°Õ∫π‰¥√∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æÕ„™ß“π°∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øø“ “¬¥π¢«≈∫°√–· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑ À“°√∂¬πµ¢Õߧ≥‰¡‰  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
¥„™√–∫∫π µÕß„™‡§√Õß·ª≈ß°√–· ‰ø™«¬ ´ß “¡“√∂À“´Õ‰¥®“°√“π¢“¬‡§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC  
§”‡µÕπ  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
‡æÕªÕß°π°“√‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√¢Õ·π–π”„Àª≈¥¢«·∫µ‡µÕ√≈∫ÕÕ°·≈«®ßµÕ “¬‰ø°Õπµ¥µß‡§√Õß  
• µ√«® Õ∫„À·π„®«“‰¥‡¥π “¬¥πµÕ√–À«“߇§√Õß°∫µ«∂ß √∂¬πµ„À¡·≈«À≈ß®“°µ¥µß  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
À¡“¬‡Àµ:  
Notes:  
• „™æ°¥®”‡æ“–·∑πø« À“°ø« ¢“¥∫Õ¬ „Àª√°…“√“ π¢“¬‡§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC  
• ¢Õ·π–π”«“„ÀµÕ≈”‚æß∑¡°”≈ߢ∫ ß ¥¡“°°«“ 50 W (∑ß∑¥“πÀ≈ß·≈–¥“πÀπ“ ‚¥¬¡§«“¡µ“π∑“π 4 Ω ∂ß 8 Ω)  
∂“°”≈ߢ∫µ”°«“ 50 W „À‡ª≈¬π§“ “AMP GAIN” ‡æÕªÕß°π‰¡„À≈”‚æß™”√¥ (¥Àπ“ 13 §”·π–π”)  
• °“√ªÕß°π°“√≈¥«ß®√ ®–µÕßæ㛮 “¬µ–°« ∑‰¡„™·≈«¥«¬‡∑ ªæ𠓬‰ø  
• ·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ®–√Õπ¡“°À≈ß®“°„™ √–¡¥√–«ßÕ¬“‰ª ¡º ‡¡Õ∂Õ¥™¥ª√–°Õ∫π  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and  
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP  
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Heat sink / ·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
¢Õ§«√√–«ß ”À√∫°“√µÕ·À≈ß®“¬°”≈ß·≈–≈”‚æß:  
• Õ¬“µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢“°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ ¡©–π𠙥ª√–°Õ∫®–‰¥√∫§«“¡‡ ¬À“¬¡“°  
• °Õπ∑®–µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢“°∫≈”‚æß „Àµ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õߧ≥„À‡√¬∫√Õ¬‡ ¬°Õπ  
your car.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
√“¬°“√ «πª√–°Õ∫ ”À√∫µ¥µß·≈–‡™Õ¡µÕ°π  
«πª√–°Õ∫µÕ‰ªπ„À¡“°∫™¥ª√–°Õ∫π À“°¡ ß„¥‰¡§√∫ °√≥“ª√°…“µ«·∑π®”À𓬇§√Õ߇ ¬ßµ¥√∂¬πµ JVC ‚¥¬∑π∑  
A / B  
Hard case/Control panel  
C
D
T·ºriπm‚≈pÀla–t¢eÕ∫·µß  
Sleeve  
ª≈Õ°À¡  
≈ß∫√√®/À𓪥  
E
F
G
H
Power cord  
“¬‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß  
Washer (ø5)  
ª√–‡°π«ß·À«π (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
πÕµ≈Õ§ (M5)  
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
≈°µ¥(M4 × 5 ¡¡.; M5 × 12.5 ¡¡.)  
I
J
H§πa∫ndߧle∫s  
K
L
B·∫atµte‡µryÕ√  
Rubber cushion  
¬“ß°π°√–·∑°  
Remote controller  
√‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈  
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
°“√µ¥µß  
(
°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡‡¢“  
)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
¿“浫լ“ßµÕ‰ªπ· ¥ß∂ß°“√µ¥µß·∫∫∑«‰ª À“°§  
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC ¢Õß∑“πÀ√Õ∫√…  
• ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ ∂“§ÿ≥‰¡·π„®«“µ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡ „ÀÀ“™“ߺ‡™¬«™“≠‡ªπºµ¥µß  
Do the required electrical connections.  
µÕ “¬‰øµ“¡∑°”À𥉫∑ßÀ¡¥  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
ßÕ·ºπ‡æÕ¬¥ª≈Õ°„ÀµÕ°π‡¢“∑  
°“√∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
°Õπ®–∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ „Àª≈¥Àπ“µ¥ «π∑“¬°Õπ  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
„ §π∫ߧ∫2 Õπ≈ß„π√Õß ”À√∫„™æπ≈«¥¥ß¿“殓°ππ  
„À‡≈Õπ™  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ÕÕ°„π¢≥–∑§Õ¬Ê¥ß§π∫ߧ∫∑ß Õß  
ÕπÕÕ°®“°°π  
When using the optional stay / ‡¡  
◊
◊
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ‡¡  
◊
ÿ
ÿ
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
µ«Õ¬“߇™π „π√∂¬πµ‚µ‚¬µ“ „À∂Õ¥«∑¬ÿµ¥√∂¬πµÕÕ°°Õπ ·≈«®ßµ¥µß‡§√Õßπ‡¢“·∑π∑  
Stay (option)  
µ«¬¥ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)  
Fire wall  
ºπß°π‰ø  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
°√À«·∫π(M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*2  
Dashboard  
·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡  
Bracket*2  
·∑π√Õß√∫*2  
Screw (option)  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
°√À«·∫π(M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*2  
°√ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)  
P°–o‡cªk“e–t  
Bracket*2  
·∑π√Õß√∫*2  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
µ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫∑¡ÿ¡µ”°«“ 30˚ Õß»“  
À¡“¬‡Àµ  
:
‡¡Õµ¥µß™¥ÿ ª√–°Õ∫≈ß„π·∑π√Õß√∫‰« „À„™ °√¬“«¢π“¥ 8 ¡¡. ∂“„™ °√¬“«°«“πÕ“®∑”„À™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‡ ¬À“¬‰¥  
*1 ‡¡Õ§  
ÿ≥µß™ÿ  
*2 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™  
1
2
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
ÿ
2
ENGLISH  
‰∑¬  
°“√‡™Õ¡‚¥¬„™‰øø“  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
A
Typical connections / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ·∫∫ª°µ  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
°Õ•∑”°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕ: µ•«®†Õ•°“•‡¥•†“¬‰ø„•••¬•µÕ¬“ß•–¡¥•–«Õ¬“„Àº¥æ•“¥„•°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕ™¥ª•–°Õ•™¥•  
°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕº¥æ•“¥Õ“®∑”„À‡°¥§«“¡‡†¬À“¬•“¬·•ß°•™¥ª•–  
°Õ••‰¥“•µ–°«¢Õ߆“¬‰ø ·•–¢ÕßÕª°••µÕ‡™•Õ¡®“°µ«• ß••Õ“®¡ ∑‰¡‡À¡•Õ•°  
1 µÕ “¬‰ø µ“¡≈”¥∫∑√–∫„π√ª¥“π≈“ß  
2 ‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫“¬Õ“°“»  
3 ¥∑“¬ µÕ «π§«∫§¡°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø‡¢“°∫™¥ª√–°Õ∫™¥π  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
Line out (see diagram  
)
“¬ÕÕ° (¥·ºπ¿¡  
)
Rear ground terminal  
®¥‡™Õ¡µÕ “¬¥π¥“πÀ≈ß  
Antenna terminal  
15 A fuse  
ø« ¢π“¥ 15 A  
¢« “¬Õ“°“»  
Ignition switch  
«∑™®¥√–‡∫¥  
Black  
¥”  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
µÕ°∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√Õ‡™ ´ ¢Õß√∂¬πµ  
Yellow *2  
‡À≈Õß*2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
µÕ°∫¢«∑¡°√–· ‰øø“„π·ºßø« ´ßµÕ°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ  
( ‚¥¬‰¡µÕß„™ «∑™®¥√–‡∫¥) (12 ‚«≈∑§ß∑)  
Fuse block  
·ºßø«  
Red  
·¥ß  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
µÕ°∫¢« «πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßø«  
Blue  
»ø“  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
‡ “Õ“°“»‰øø“Õµ‚π¡µ À“°¡ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 250 mA)  
Blue with white stripe  
π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
µÕ‡¢“°∫Õª°√≥Õπ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 200 mA)  
Orange with white stripe  
¡·∂∫¢“«  
To car light control switch  
«µ´§«∫§¡‰ø¢Õß√∂¬πµ√  
Green with black stripe  
White with black stripe  
Gray with black stripe  
White  
Purple with black stripe  
Gray  
Green  
Purple  
‡¢¬«·∂∫¥”  
¢“«·∂∫¥”  
‡∑“·∂∫¥”  
¢“«  
¡«ß·∂∫¥”  
‡∑“  
‡¢¬«  
¡«ß  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
≈”‚æß´“¬ (Àπ“)  
≈”‚æߢ«“ (Àπ“)  
≈”‚æß´“¬ (À≈ß)  
≈”‚æߢ«“ (À≈ß)  
1
2
*1 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™¥ª√–°Õ∫π  
*2 °Õπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™¥ª√–°Õ∫π°Õπ∑®–µ¥µß µÕßµÕ “¬µ–°«π°Õπ¡©–ππ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥  
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power  
cannot be turned on.  
3
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / µÕ·Õ¡ª≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√·≈–/À√Õ´∫«ø‡øÕ√¥“πÕ°  
B
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
§≥ “¡“√∂µÕ°∫·Õ¡æ≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√‰¥À≈¬“‡æՇ桧≥¿“æ‡ ¬ß„À°∫√–∫∫ ‡µÕ√‚Õ„π√∂¬πµ  
• µÕ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈ ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«) ‡¢“°∫ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈¢ÕßÕª°√≥Õπ Ê ‡æÕ®– “¡“√∂§«∫§¡‚¥¬™¥ª√–  
°Õ∫π‰¥  
• ∂Õ¥≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°™¥ª√–°Õ∫π ·≈«µÕ‡¢“°∫‡§√Õߢ¬“¬ ∑ß “¬µ–°«≈”‚æߢÕß™¥ª√–°Õ∫π‰«  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
¢ÕµÕ√ªµ« Y ( ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™¥ª√–°Õ∫π)  
Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W” (See  
page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page  
13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°• ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«)  
µß§“ “L/O MODE” ‡ªìπ “SUB.W”  
µß§“ “L/O MODE” ‡ªìπ “REAR”  
(¥Àπ“ 13 §”·π–π”)  
(¥Àπ“ 13 §”·π–π”)  
You can also connect a subwoofer to  
the REAR LINE OUT terminals.  
∑“π¬ß “¡“√∂µÕ´∫«ø‡øÕ√‡¢“°∫™ÕßµÕ ≠≠“≥  
REAR LINE OUT ‰¥  
To the remote lead of other  
equipment or automatic  
antenna if any  
You can connect a power amplifier for  
rear speakers.  
∑“π “¡“√∂µÕ‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß‡ªπ≈”‚æßÀ≈߉¥  
µÕ “¬°∫Õª°√≥ÕπÀ√Õ‡ “Õ“°“»Õ  
µ‚π¡µ∂“¡  
or  
À√Õ  
Subwoofer  
Rear speakers  
´∫«ø‡øÕ√  
≈”‚æßÀ≈ß  
JVC Amplifier  
‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC  
JVC Amplifier  
‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC  
Front speakers  
≈”‚æßÀπ“  
3
*3 “¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°•  
*
*
Remote lead  
4
4
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with  
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to  
the unit.  
*
µÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π„À·ππ‡¢“°∫µ«∂߇À≈° À√Õµ«∂ß√∂—µ√ß «π ∑‰¡¡ ‡§≈Õ∫ (À“°¡ ‡§≈Õ∫Õ¬ „À¢¥ ÕÕ°°Õπ °ÕπµÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π)  
À“°‰¡ªØ∫µµ“¡§”·π–π”𠇧√ÕßÕ“®™”√¥À√Õ‡ ¬À“¬‰¥  
5
*
“¬‡§‡∫≈ ≠≠“≥ ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™¥ª√–°Õ∫π)  
(
5
*
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
°“√µ√«® Õ∫ª≠À“¢¥¢Õß  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
• ø« ¢“¥  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ¥”·≈– ·¥ßÕ¬“ß∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡  
• ‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ‡À≈ÕßÀ√Õ‰¡  
• ‰¡¡‡ ¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æ߇°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√À√Õ‰¡  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• ‡ ¬ß‡æ¬π  
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡  
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥ“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
• ‡ ¬ß√∫°«π  
* ¡°“√„™ “¬ πÊ À√ÕÀπ“Ê µÕ®“°‡§√Õß «π∑µ¥µß ‰«∫πæπ¥“πÀ≈ß°∫µ«∂ß√∂¬πµÀ√Õ‰¡  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• ™¥ª√–°Õ∫√Õπ¢÷π  
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡  
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥ“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• ‡§√Õß√∫π∑”ß“π‰¡  
* ∑“π‰¥µß‡§√Õß„À¡·≈«À√Õ¬ß  
4
CD RECEIVER  
KD-G646/KD-G645  
KD-G646/KD-G645  
ALAT PENERIMA CD  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
Untuk membatalkan tampilan demonstrasi, lihat halaman 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Untuk instalasi dan penyambungan, lihat buku pedoman terpisah.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
BUKU PETUNJUK  
GET0502-004A  
[UN]  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to reset your unit  
[European Union only]  
Warning:  
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Caution on volume setting:  
Digital devices (CD/USB) produce very little noise  
compared with other sources. Lower the volume  
before playing these digital sources to avoid  
damaging the speakers by sudden increase of the  
output level.  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
2
How to use the M MODE button  
CONTENTS  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons will work  
as different function buttons.  
Control panel —KD-G646/KD-G645 .......  
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........  
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
6
6
Radio operations .............................  
7
Disc/USB device operations ..............  
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................  
Playing from a USB device....................................  
8
8
8
To use these buttons for their original functions  
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds  
without pressing any of these buttons until the  
functions mode is cleared, or press M MODE again.  
Sound adjustments.......................... 11  
General settings — PSM .................. 12  
Other external component  
operations ................................... 14  
Detaching the control panel  
Title assignment.............................. 14  
Maintenance ................................... 15  
More about this unit ........................ 16  
Troubleshooting.............................. 19  
Specifications.................................. 21  
Attaching the control panel  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
The control panel illustrations used for explanation  
in this manual is of KD-G645.  
3
Control panel —  
KD-G646/KD-G645  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons  
2 0 (eject) button  
o
;
a
s
d
f
Number buttons  
RPT (repeat) button  
RND (random) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
USB (Universal Serial Bus) input jack  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Time countdown indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer) indicators  
—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ, ROCK, POPS, USER  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
3
4
5
(standby/on attenuator) button  
Control dial  
Remote sensor  
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
BAND button  
Loading slot  
Display window  
EQ (equalizer) button  
DISP (display) button  
(control panel release) button  
SRC (source) button  
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
g
h
j
k
l
e 4 /¢ buttons  
r
t
y
u
i
AUX (auxiliary) button  
SEL (select) button  
M MODE button  
MO (monaural) button  
/
z
x
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (folder), (track/file)  
Main display  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
c
4
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Warning:  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or  
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as the dashboard) exposed to direct  
sunlight for a long time; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid the risk of accidents.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar  
tools.  
3
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
4
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
5
SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
5
Basic settings  
Getting started  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 12 and  
13.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
* You cannot select these sources if they are not  
ready or not connected.  
Select “CLOCK HOUR,” then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK MIN” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
! For FM/AM tuner  
3
Finish the procedure.  
⁄ Adjust the volume.  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Clock time is shown on the display for  
about 5 seconds. See also page 13.  
Volume level appears.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 11 and 12.)  
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound, press the  
button again.  
To turn off the power  
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Ÿ
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
! Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
2
3
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
Continued on the next page  
7
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.50MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
Disc / USB device  
operations  
1
2
: For built-in CD player operations.  
: For external USB device operations.  
Playing a disc in the unit  
3
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Listening to a preset station  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the  
source or eject the disc.  
1
To stop play and eject the disc  
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
or  
Playing from a USB device  
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB  
device (except HDD).  
All tracks in the USB device will be played repeatedly  
until you change the source.  
To check the other information while  
listening to an FM or AM station  
USB input jack  
~
Frequency = Clock =  
Station name* = (back to the  
beginning)  
* If no title is assigned to a station, “NO NAME” appears.  
To assign a title to a station, see page 14.  
8
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous track  
Ÿ
USB memory  
If a USB device has been attached...  
To go to the next or previous folder (for  
MP3/WMA)  
Playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• If a different USB device is currently attached,  
playback starts from the beginning.  
To detach the USB device, straightly pull it out from  
the unit.  
• Removing the USB device will also stop playback.  
Then, press SRC to listen to another playback source.  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA) directly  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
Cautions:  
• Avoid using the USB device if it might hinder your  
safety driving.  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
• Do not pull out or attach the USB device  
repeatedly while “READING” appears on the  
display.  
• Do not start a car engine if a USB device is  
connected.  
• This unit may not be able to play the files  
depending on the type of the USB device.  
• Operation and power supply may not work as  
intended for some USB devices.  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA, it is  
required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3/WMA):  
• You cannot connect a computer to the USB input  
jack of the unit.  
• Make sure all important data has been backed up  
to avoid losing the data.  
• Do not leave a USB device in the car, expose to  
direct sunlight, or high temperature to avoid  
deformation or cause damage to the USB device.  
• Some USB devices may not work immediately  
after you turn on the power.  
• For more details about USB operations, see pages  
17 and 18.  
9
Other main functions  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or CD Text  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3/WMA, you can skip tracks within the same  
folder  
A = Disc title/performer*1 = Track  
title*1 [ ] = B = (back to the beginning)  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
While playing an MP3/WMA disc or  
USB device  
1
• When “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 13)  
2
A = Album name/performer (folder  
name*2) [  
name*2) [  
beginning)  
] = Track title (file  
] = B = (back to the  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
• When “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF”  
3
A = Folder name [ ] = File name  
[
] = B = (back to the beginning)  
A
B
:
:
Clock with the current track number  
The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
2
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
10  
Selecting the playback modes  
Sound adjustments  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
Preset values  
BAS MID TRE LOUD  
Indication (For)  
7
USER  
(Flat sound)  
00  
00 00 OFF  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
TRACK RPT  
:
The current track. [  
]
+03 00 +02 OFF  
+01 00 +03 OFF  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 OFF  
+03 00 +03 OFF  
FOLDER RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.  
[
]
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
RPT OFF  
:
Cancels.  
7
Random play  
POPS  
(Light music)  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
Mode  
Plays at random  
FOLDER RND * : All tracks of the current folder,  
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
then the tracks of the next folder  
and so on. [  
]
ALL RND  
RND OFF  
:
:
All tracks of the current disc or  
BAS: Bass MID: Mid-range TRE: Treble LOUD: Loudness  
USB device. [  
Cancels.  
]
* Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/USB).  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the  
display  
1
* Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W”  
(see page 13).  
2
Continued on the next page  
11  
Indication, [Range]  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
BASS *1, [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
listed in the table on page 13.  
MIDDLE *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
1
TREBLE *1, [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
2
Select a PSM item.  
FADER *2, [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.  
BALANCE *3, [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.  
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
LOUD *4 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.  
SUB.W*5, [00 to 08, initial: 04]  
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
Adjust the subwoofer output level.  
VOL ADJ (volume adjust), [–05 to +05, initial: 00]  
Adjust the volume level of each source (except FM), in  
relation to the FM volume level. The volume level will  
automatically increase or decrease when you change  
the source.  
Finish the procedure.  
• Before making an adjustment, select the source you  
want to adjust.  
VOLUME, [00 to 50 or 00 to 30] *6  
Adjust the volume.  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the  
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently  
selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.  
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be  
applied to all sound modes.  
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W”  
(see page 13).  
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 13 for details.)  
2
*
3
4
*
*
5
6
*
*
12  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
DEMO  
Display  
demonstration  
• DEMO ON  
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
• DEMO OFF  
:
:
CLOCK DISP *1  
• CLOCK ON  
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is  
Clock display  
turned off.  
• CLOCK OFF : Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds  
when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK HOUR  
Hour adjustment  
1 – 12  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]  
CLOCK MIN  
Minute adjustment  
00 – 59  
• AUTO  
DIMMER  
:
Dims the display and button illumination when you turn on the  
Dimmer  
headlights.  
• ON  
• OFF  
:
:
Activates dimmer.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL *2  
Scroll  
• ONCE  
• AUTO  
• OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
L/O MODE  
Line output mode  
• REAR  
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the  
speakers (through an external amplifier).  
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a  
subwoofer (through an external amplifier).  
• SUB.W  
SUB.W FREQ*3  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
• LOW  
• MID  
• HIGH  
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
TAG DISPLAY  
Tag display  
• TAG ON  
• TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain  
control  
•
LOW POWER  
:
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the  
speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speaker.)  
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
•
HIGH POWER  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select  
“CLOCK OFF” that you save the car’s battery.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”  
2
3
*
*
13  
Other external component Title assignment  
operations  
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and  
AM) and up to 8 characters for each station name.  
You can connect an external component to the  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
1
2
Select FM/AM.  
Show the title entry screen.  
Portable audio player, etc  
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
(not supplied)  
3
Assign a title.  
1
Select a character.  
~
• You can also select “AUX IN” as the playback  
source by pressing the SRC (source) button.  
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character  
position.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish  
entering the title.  
4
Finish the procedure.  
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 11 and 12.)  
To erase the entire title  
In step 2 above...  
To check the other information while  
listening to an external component  
Clock Ô AUX IN  
14  
To keep discs clean  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Connectors  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
Center holder  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Sticker and  
sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
Unusual shape  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
15  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
• By pressing SRC or AUX on the unit, you can also turn  
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also  
starts.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as  
those which are detected first if a disc includes both  
audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on  
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for  
the following reasons:  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc,  
disc play will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
• During SSM search...  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA  
formats.  
16  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB device  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• While playing from a USB device, the playback order  
may differ from other players.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some USB  
devices or some files due to their characteristics or  
recording conditions.  
– Bit rate of WMA: 16 kbps — 32 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 22.05 kHz)  
• Depending on the shape of the USB devices and  
connection ports, some USB devices may not be  
attached properly or the connection might be loose.  
• Connect one USB mass storage class device to the unit  
at a time. Do not use a USB hub.  
32 kbps — 320 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 48 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
• If the connected USB device does not have the correct  
files, “NO FILE” appears.  
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate of MP3: 16 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency of MP3:  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 255  
folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5)  
– Bit rate of WMA:  
16 kbps — 32 kbps  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
(Sampling frequency: 22.05 kHz)  
32 kbps — 320 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)  
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
Continued on the next page  
17  
• The maximum number of characters for:  
– Folder names : 25 characters  
– File names : 25 characters  
– MP3 Tag : 128 characters  
– WMA Tag : 64 characters  
General settings—PSM  
• “AUTO” setting for “DIMMER” may not work correctly  
on some vehicles, particularly on those having a  
control dial for dimming.  
In this case, change the “DIMMER” setting to any  
other than “AUTO.”  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOLUME 30.”  
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files, 255  
folders (999 files per folder), and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit does not support SD card reader.  
• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating  
is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.  
• USB devices equipped with special functions such as  
data security functions cannot be used with the unit.  
• Do not use a USB device with 2 or more partitions.  
• This unit may not recognized a USB device connected  
through a USB card reader.  
• This unit may not play back files in a USB device  
properly when using a USB extension cord.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station  
frequencies, “NAMEFULL” appears. Delete unwanted  
titles before assignment.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops.  
Next time you select the same source again, playback  
starts from where it has been stopped previously.  
Ejecting a disc or removing a USB device  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust.  
• After ejecting a disc or removing a USB device,  
“NO DISC” or “NO USB“ appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,  
reattach a USB device, or press SRC to select another  
playback source.  
18  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
•
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you  
used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and ”EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file  
names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
Continued on the next page  
19  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you  
have intended.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
album name).  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to  
another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or  
<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• “READING” keeps flashing on the display.  
• Readout time varies depending on the USB device.  
• Do not use too many hierarchy, folders, and empty  
folders*.  
• Turn off the power then on again.  
• Reattach the USB device again.  
* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains  
data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.  
• Tracks/folders are not played back in the  
order you have intended.  
The playback order is determined by the write-in time  
stamp. The first track/folder written into the USB device  
will be the first track/folder for playback.  
• “NO FILE” flashes on the display.  
• “NO USB” appears on the display.  
• The unit cannot detect the USB device.  
• Attach a USB device that contains tracks encoded in an  
appropriate format.  
• Reattach the USB device again.  
• “READ” and “FAILED” appear alternately on The total number of tracks could not be accessed properly.  
the display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.  
album name).  
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• While playing a track, sound is sometimes  
interrupted.  
The MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into  
the USB device.  
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB device, and try  
again.  
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
20  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more  
than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
12 dB at 1 kHz  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
Mid-range:  
Treble:  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
USB SECTION  
USB Standard:  
USB 1.1, USB 2.0  
Max. 12 Mbps  
Line-Out Level/  
Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Data Transfer Rate  
(Full Speed):  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Storage:  
Less than 8 GB (1 partition type)  
Mass storage class (except HDD)  
Subwoofer-Out Level/ 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Impedance:  
Compatible Device:  
Other Terminal:  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, USB  
input jack  
Compatible File System: FAT 32/16/12  
Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA  
Max. Current:  
500 mA  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
AM:  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Grounding System:  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity:  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature:  
Alternate Channel  
65 dB  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Installation Size:  
Panel Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm  
Stereo Separation:  
30 dB  
Mass:  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
AM Tuner  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
21  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Ada MASALAH dengan cara  
pengoperasian?  
Setel kembali unit Anda  
Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda  
EN, IN  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1007DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-G646/KD-G645  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan  
1007DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, IN  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0502-009A  
[UN]  
ENGLISH  
INDONESIA  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does Unit ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika kendaraan  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli di penyalur-  
penyalur audio mobil JVC.  
WARNINGS  
PERINGATAN  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan unit ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.  
Notes:  
Catatan:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio • Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada  
dealer. penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.  
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and • Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya  
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP  
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 Ω sampai 8 Ω). Jika maksimum power kurang  
dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “AMP GAIN” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker  
dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 13 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).  
• Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan  
pita isolasi.  
• Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika  
memindahkan unit ini.  
Heat sink / Pendingin  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan  
sambungan-sambungan speaker:  
• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,  
unit tersebut akan secara serius rusak.  
• SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan  
speaker dalam mobil anda.  
your car.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk unit ini. Jika ada bagian yang hilang, segera hubungi dealer  
audio mobil JVC anda.  
A / B  
C
D
Hard case/Control panel  
Kotak keras/Panel kontrol  
Sleeve  
Selongsong  
Trim plate  
Plat rapi  
E
F
G
H
Power cord  
Kabel power  
Washer (ø5)  
Perapat sambungan (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Mur kunci (M5)  
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
Baut bingkai (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)  
I
J
K
L
Rubber cushion  
Bantalan karet  
Handles  
Pegangan-pegangan  
Remote controller  
Pengontrol jauh  
Battery  
Baterai  
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)  
Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau  
informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC  
atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.  
• Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang unit ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan teknisi yang  
berkualitas.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan listrik yang  
diperlukan.  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat  
untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat  
pada tempatnya.  
Removing the unit  
Memindahkan unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Sebelum memindahkan unit, lepaskan seksi belakang.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik pemegang  
seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga unit dapat  
dipindahkan.  
When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan  
penguat tambahan  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang unit tanpa  
menggunakan selongsong  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang unit tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.  
Stay (option)  
Penguat (tambahan)  
Fire wall  
Dinding tahan api  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Sekrup kepala rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Dashboard  
Tempat alat pada  
bagian depan  
Bracket*2  
Breket*2  
Screw (option)  
Sekrup (tambahan)  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Sekrup kepala rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Pocket  
Kantong  
Bracket*2  
Breket*2  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
: Ketika memasang alat penerima pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-sekrup panjang–  
8 mm. Jika sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak unit.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Pasang penerima pada suatu sudut kurang  
dari 30˚.  
Catatan  
1
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Ketika anda memberdirikan unit, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.  
Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.  
2
2
2
ENGLISH  
INDONESIA  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK  
A Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang tidak  
benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada unit.  
Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.  
2 Sambungkan kabel antena.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke unit.  
Line out (see diagram  
Keluaran (lihat diagram  
)
)
Rear ground terminal  
Terminal tanah belakang  
Antenna terminal  
Terminal antena  
15 A fuse  
Sekring 15 A  
Ignition switch  
Saklar kontak  
Black  
Hitam  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut  
Yellow *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Kuning *2  
Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai  
mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)  
Fuse block  
Blok sekring  
Red  
Merah  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring  
Blue  
Biru  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)  
Blue with white stripe  
Biru dengan strip putih  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)  
Orange with white stripe  
Oranye dengan strip putih  
To car light control switch  
Ke saklar kontrol lampu mobil  
White with black stripe  
Putih dengan strip hitam  
Gray with black stripe  
Abu-abu dengan strip hitam  
Gray  
Abu-abu  
Green with black stripe  
Hijau dengan strip hitam  
Green  
Hijau  
Purple with black stripe  
Ungu dengan strip hitam  
Purple  
Ungu  
White  
Putih  
Left speaker (front)  
Speaker kiri (depan)  
Right speaker (front)  
Speaker kanan (depan)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Speaker kanan (belakang)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Speaker kiri (belakang)  
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Tidak disediakan untuk unit ini.  
Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari unit ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah dihubungkan,  
selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power  
cannot be turned on.  
3
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer Penyambungan penguat-penguat eksternal dan/atau subwoofer  
B
/
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat-penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.  
• Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat  
dikontrol melalui unit ini.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari alat penerima ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat.  
Biarkan ujung speaker dari unit ini tidak digunakan.  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)  
Front speakers  
Speaker-speaker depan  
JVC Amplifier  
Penguat JVC  
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page  
13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Setel “L/O MODE” ke “REAR” (Lihat  
Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W” (See page  
13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Setel “L/O MODE” ke “SUB.W” (Lihat  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih)  
halaman 13 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.)  
You can connect a power amplifier for  
rear speakers.  
Anda dapat menghubungkan penguat  
daya untuk pengeras suara bagian  
belakang.  
halaman 13 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.)  
You can also connect a subwoofer to  
the REAR LINE OUT terminals.  
Anda juga dapat menghubungkan  
subwoofer ke terminal REAR LINE  
OUT.  
To the remote lead of other  
equipment or automatic  
antenna if any  
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan  
lain atau antena otomatis jika  
ada  
or  
atau  
Rear speakers  
Speaker-speaker  
belakang  
Subwoofer  
Subwoofer  
JVC Amplifier  
Penguat JVC  
JVC Amplifier  
Penguat JVC  
Front speakers  
Speaker-speaker depan  
3
3
*
*
Ujung jauh  
*
*
Remote lead  
4
4
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with  
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to  
the unit.  
Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat  
(jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan  
kerusakan pada unit tersebut.  
5
5
*
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
*
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk unit ini)  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
PEMECAHAN MASALAH  
• The fuse blows.  
• Sekring meledak.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Suara terdistorsi.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?  
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan  
tertebal?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
• Unit menjadi panas.  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?  
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Unit ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.  
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) unit anda?  
4
CD RECEIVER  
KD-G646/KD-G645  
KD-G646/KD-G645  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0502-005A  
[UT]  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to reset your unit  
[European Union only]  
Warning:  
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Caution on volume setting:  
Digital devices (CD/USB) produce very little noise  
compared with other sources. Lower the volume  
before playing these digital sources to avoid  
damaging the speakers by sudden increase of the  
output level.  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
• If this does not work, reset your unit.  
2
How to use the M MODE button  
CONTENTS  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons will work  
as different function buttons.  
Control panel —KD-G646/KD-G645 .......  
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........  
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
6
6
Radio operations .............................  
7
Disc/USB device operations ..............  
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................  
Playing from a USB device....................................  
8
8
8
To use these buttons for their original functions  
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds  
without pressing any of these buttons until the  
functions mode is cleared, or press M MODE again.  
Sound adjustments.......................... 11  
General settings — PSM .................. 12  
Other external component  
operations ................................... 14  
Detaching the control panel  
Title assignment.............................. 14  
Maintenance ................................... 15  
More about this unit ........................ 16  
Troubleshooting.............................. 19  
Specifications.................................. 21  
Attaching the control panel  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
The control panel illustrations used for explanation  
in this manual is of KD-G645.  
3
Control panel —  
KD-G646/KD-G645  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons  
2 0 (eject) button  
o
;
a
s
d
f
Number buttons  
RPT (repeat) button  
RND (random) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
USB (Universal Serial Bus) input jack  
Source display / Track number / Folder number /  
Time countdown indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),  
MO (monaural)  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer) indicators  
—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ, ROCK, POPS, USER  
LOUD (loudness) indicator  
3
4
5
(standby/on attenuator) button  
Control dial  
Remote sensor  
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
BAND button  
Loading slot  
Display window  
EQ (equalizer) button  
DISP (display) button  
(control panel release) button  
SRC (source) button  
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
g
h
j
k
l
e 4 /¢ buttons  
r
t
y
u
i
AUX (auxiliary) button  
SEL (select) button  
M MODE button  
MO (monaural) button  
/
z
x
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (folder), (track/file)  
Main display  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
c
4
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Warning:  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or  
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as the dashboard) exposed to direct  
sunlight for a long time; otherwise, it may  
explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid the risk of accidents.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar  
tools.  
3
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
4
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
5
SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
5
Basic settings  
Getting started  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 12 and  
13.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
* You cannot select these sources if they are not  
ready or not connected.  
Select “CLOCK HOUR,” then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK MIN” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
! For FM/AM tuner  
3
Finish the procedure.  
⁄ Adjust the volume.  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Clock time is shown on the display for  
about 5 seconds. See also page 13.  
Volume level appears.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 11 and 12.)  
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound, press the  
button again.  
To turn off the power  
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Ÿ
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
! Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
2
3
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
Continued on the next page  
7
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.50MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
Disc / USB device  
operations  
1
2
: For built-in CD player operations.  
: For external USB device operations.  
Playing a disc in the unit  
3
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Listening to a preset station  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the  
source or eject the disc.  
1
To stop play and eject the disc  
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
or  
Playing from a USB device  
This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB  
device (except HDD).  
All tracks in the USB device will be played repeatedly  
until you change the source.  
To check the other information while  
listening to an FM or AM station  
USB input jack  
~
Frequency = Clock =  
Station name* = (back to the  
beginning)  
* If no title is assigned to a station, “NO NAME” appears.  
To assign a title to a station, see page 14.  
8
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous track  
Ÿ
USB memory  
If a USB device has been attached...  
To go to the next or previous folder (for  
MP3/WMA)  
Playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously.  
• If a different USB device is currently attached,  
playback starts from the beginning.  
To detach the USB device, straightly pull it out from  
the unit.  
• Removing the USB device will also stop playback.  
Then, press SRC to listen to another playback source.  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3/WMA) directly  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
Cautions:  
• Avoid using the USB device if it might hinder your  
safety driving.  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
• Do not pull out or attach the USB device  
repeatedly while “READING” appears on the  
display.  
• Do not start a car engine if a USB device is  
connected.  
• This unit may not be able to play the files  
depending on the type of the USB device.  
• Operation and power supply may not work as  
intended for some USB devices.  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA, it is  
required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3/WMA):  
• You cannot connect a computer to the USB input  
jack of the unit.  
• Make sure all important data has been backed up  
to avoid losing the data.  
• Do not leave a USB device in the car, expose to  
direct sunlight, or high temperature to avoid  
deformation or cause damage to the USB device.  
• Some USB devices may not work immediately  
after you turn on the power.  
• For more details about USB operations, see pages  
17 and 18.  
9
Other main functions  
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or CD Text  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3/WMA, you can skip tracks within the same  
folder  
A = Disc title/performer*1 = Track  
title*1 [ ] = B = (back to the beginning)  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
While playing an MP3/WMA disc or  
USB device  
1
• When “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 13)  
2
A = Album name/performer (folder  
name*2) [  
name*2) [  
beginning)  
] = Track title (file  
] = B = (back to the  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
• When “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF”  
3
A = Folder name [ ] = File name  
[
] = B = (back to the beginning)  
A
B
:
:
Clock with the current track number  
The elapsed playing time with the current track  
number  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display  
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
2
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
10  
Selecting the playback modes  
Sound adjustments  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
Preset values  
BAS MID TRE LOUD  
Indication (For)  
7
USER  
(Flat sound)  
00  
00 00 OFF  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
TRACK RPT  
:
The current track. [  
]
+03 00 +02 OFF  
+01 00 +03 OFF  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 OFF  
+03 00 +03 OFF  
FOLDER RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.  
[
]
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
RPT OFF  
:
Cancels.  
7
Random play  
POPS  
(Light music)  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
Mode  
Plays at random  
FOLDER RND * : All tracks of the current folder,  
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
then the tracks of the next folder  
and so on. [  
]
ALL RND  
RND OFF  
:
:
All tracks of the current disc or  
BAS: Bass MID: Mid-range TRE: Treble LOUD: Loudness  
USB device. [  
Cancels.  
]
* Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/USB).  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the  
display  
1
* Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W”  
(see page 13).  
2
Continued on the next page  
11  
Indication, [Range]  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
BASS *1, [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
listed in the table on page 13.  
MIDDLE *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
1
TREBLE *1, [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
2
Select a PSM item.  
FADER *2, [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.  
BALANCE *3, [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.  
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
LOUD *4 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]  
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a  
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.  
SUB.W*5, [00 to 08, initial: 04]  
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
Adjust the subwoofer output level.  
VOL ADJ (volume adjust), [–05 to +05, initial: 00]  
Adjust the volume level of each source (except FM), in  
relation to the FM volume level. The volume level will  
automatically increase or decrease when you change  
the source.  
Finish the procedure.  
• Before making an adjustment, select the source you  
want to adjust.  
VOLUME, [00 to 50 or 00 to 30] *6  
Adjust the volume.  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the  
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently  
selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.  
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be  
applied to all sound modes.  
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W”  
(see page 13).  
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 13 for details.)  
2
*
3
4
*
*
5
6
*
*
12  
Indications  
Item  
Selectable settings, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
DEMO  
Display  
demonstration  
• DEMO ON  
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
• DEMO OFF  
:
:
CLOCK DISP *1  
• CLOCK ON  
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is  
Clock display  
turned off.  
• CLOCK OFF : Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds  
when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK HOUR  
Hour adjustment  
1 – 12  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]  
CLOCK MIN  
Minute adjustment  
00 – 59  
• AUTO  
DIMMER  
:
Dims the display and button illumination when you turn on the  
Dimmer  
headlights.  
• ON  
• OFF  
:
:
Activates dimmer.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL *2  
Scroll  
• ONCE  
• AUTO  
• OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
L/O MODE  
Line output mode  
• REAR  
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the  
speakers (through an external amplifier).  
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a  
subwoofer (through an external amplifier).  
• SUB.W  
SUB.W FREQ*3  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
• LOW  
• MID  
• HIGH  
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
TAG DISPLAY  
Tag display  
• TAG ON  
• TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain  
control  
•
LOW POWER  
:
:
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the  
speaker is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speaker.)  
VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50  
•
HIGH POWER  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select  
“CLOCK OFF” that you save the car’s battery.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”  
2
3
*
*
13  
Other external component Title assignment  
operations  
You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and  
AM) and up to 8 characters for each station name.  
You can connect an external component to the  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
1
2
Select FM/AM.  
Show the title entry screen.  
Portable audio player, etc  
3.5 mm stereo mini plug  
(not supplied)  
3
Assign a title.  
1
Select a character.  
~
• You can also select “AUX IN” as the playback  
source by pressing the SRC (source) button.  
2
3
Move to the next (or previous) character  
position.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish  
entering the title.  
4
Finish the procedure.  
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 11 and 12.)  
To erase the entire title  
In step 2 above...  
To check the other information while  
listening to an external component  
Clock Ô AUX IN  
14  
To keep discs clean  
Maintenance  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Connectors  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
Warped disc  
How to handle discs  
Center holder  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Sticker and  
sticker residue  
Stick-on label  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
Unusual shape  
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.  
15  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
• By pressing SRC or AUX on the unit, you can also turn  
on the power. If the source is ready, playback also  
starts.  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as  
those which are detected first if a disc includes both  
audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on  
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for  
the following reasons:  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc,  
disc play will start from where it had been stopped  
previously next time you turn on the power.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
• During SSM search...  
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens  
inside the unit.  
– All previously stored stations are erased and the  
stations are stored anew.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperature or high  
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce  
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs  
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA  
formats.  
16  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB device  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• While playing from a USB device, the playback order  
may differ from other players.  
• This unit may be unable to play back some USB  
devices or some files due to their characteristics or  
recording conditions.  
– Bit rate of WMA: 16 kbps — 32 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 22.05 kHz)  
• Depending on the shape of the USB devices and  
connection ports, some USB devices may not be  
attached properly or the connection might be loose.  
• Connect one USB mass storage class device to the unit  
at a time. Do not use a USB hub.  
32 kbps — 320 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 48 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary depending on the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
• If the connected USB device does not have the correct  
files, “NO FILE” appears.  
• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate of MP3: 16 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency of MP3:  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 255  
folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (for MPEG-2.5)  
– Bit rate of WMA:  
16 kbps — 32 kbps  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the  
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual  
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes  
noticeable after performing the search function.  
(Sampling frequency: 22.05 kHz)  
32 kbps — 320 kbps  
(Sampling frequency: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)  
• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR  
(variable bit rate).  
Continued on the next page  
17  
• The maximum number of characters for:  
– Folder names : 25 characters  
– File names : 25 characters  
– MP3 Tag : 128 characters  
– WMA Tag : 64 characters  
General settings—PSM  
• “AUTO” setting for “DIMMER” may not work correctly  
on some vehicles, particularly on those having a  
control dial for dimming.  
In this case, change the “DIMMER” setting to any  
other than “AUTO.”  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while the  
volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,” the  
unit automatically changes the volume level to  
“VOLUME 30.”  
• This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files, 255  
folders (999 files per folder), and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit does not support SD card reader.  
• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating  
is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.  
• USB devices equipped with special functions such as  
data security functions cannot be used with the unit.  
• Do not use a USB device with 2 or more partitions.  
• This unit may not recognized a USB device connected  
through a USB card reader.  
• This unit may not play back files in a USB device  
properly when using a USB extension cord.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
Title assignment  
• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station  
frequencies, “NAMEFULL” appears. Delete unwanted  
titles before assignment.  
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.  
Changing the source  
• If you change the source, playback also stops.  
Next time you select the same source again, playback  
starts from where it has been stopped previously.  
Ejecting a disc or removing a USB device  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again  
to protect it from dust.  
• After ejecting a disc or removing a USB device,  
“NO DISC” or “NO USB“ appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,  
reattach a USB device, or press SRC to select another  
playback source.  
18  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
•
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you  
used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• “PLEASE” and ”EJECT” appear alternately on  
the display.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format  
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or  
Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file  
names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA  
tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required  
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.  
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).  
Continued on the next page  
19  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks are not played back in the order you  
have intended.  
The playback order is determined when the files are  
recorded.  
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by  
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
album name).  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to  
another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or  
<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)  
• “READING” keeps flashing on the display.  
• Readout time varies depending on the USB device.  
• Do not use too many hierarchy, folders, and empty  
folders*.  
• Turn off the power then on again.  
• Reattach the USB device again.  
* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains  
data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.  
• Tracks/folders are not played back in the  
order you have intended.  
The playback order is determined by the write-in time  
stamp. The first track/folder written into the USB device  
will be the first track/folder for playback.  
• “NO FILE” flashes on the display.  
• “NO USB” appears on the display.  
• The unit cannot detect the USB device.  
• Attach a USB device that contains tracks encoded in an  
appropriate format.  
• Reattach the USB device again.  
• “READ” and “FAILED” appear alternately on The total number of tracks could not be accessed properly.  
the display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.  
album name).  
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),  
numbers, and a limited number of symbols.  
• While playing a track, sound is sometimes  
interrupted.  
The MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into  
the USB device.  
Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB device, and try  
again.  
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
20  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Front/Rear:  
50 W per channel  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more  
than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
12 dB at 1 kHz  
12 dB at 10 kHz  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
Mid-range:  
Treble:  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
USB SECTION  
USB Standard:  
USB 1.1, USB 2.0  
Max. 12 Mbps  
Line-Out Level/  
Impedance:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Data Transfer Rate  
(Full Speed):  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Storage:  
Less than 8 GB (1 partition type)  
Mass storage class (except HDD)  
Subwoofer-Out Level/ 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Impedance:  
Compatible Device:  
Other Terminal:  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, USB  
input jack  
Compatible File System: FAT 32/16/12  
Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA  
Max. Current:  
500 mA  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
AM:  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Grounding System:  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity:  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature:  
Alternate Channel  
65 dB  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Installation Size:  
Panel Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm  
Stereo Separation:  
30 dB  
Mass:  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
AM Tuner  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
21  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
EN, CT  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1007DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-G646/KD-G645  
Installation/Connection Manual  
安裝/連接手冊  
1007DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, CT  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0502-010A  
[UT]  
ENGLISH  
中文  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does 本機僅可使用直流 12 V 、負極接地的電源系統。如果您的車輛沒有這一電源  
系統，則需要 一個電  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
壓變換器，可以在 JVC 汽車音響分銷商處買到。  
WARNINGS  
警告  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all 為防止短路，建議在安裝本機之前  
，拔開電池的負極，並把所有電路都連接好。  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
• 安裝完畢後務必將本機的地線重新接至車身。  
注意:  
Notes:  
•
把保險 絲更換為額定負荷值的保險 絲。如果保險 絲經常燒壞，請向  
• 後置和前 揚聲器的最大輸入功率應大於 50 W，其阻抗為 4 Ω - 8 Ω。如果最大功率小於 50 W，  
請調校“AMP GAIN”設定值，以防止揚聲器損壞。（參閱使用說明書的第 13 頁。）  
• 為防止電源短路，請用絕緣帶包住未使用電線的端子。  
JVC 汽車音響分銷商詢問。  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer.  
置
• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and  
at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP  
GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
• 本機使用後，散熱片會很熱。因此，在移出本機時，小心不要 觸摸散熱片。  
Heat sink / 散熱片  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
電源和揚聲器接線注意事項:  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
• 切勿把揚聲器導線接頭接至電池，否則本機將會嚴重損壞。  
will be seriously damaged.  
• 在把揚聲器導線接頭接至揚聲器之前  
，檢查您汽車上的揚聲器線路。  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
用於安裝和連接的零組件清單  
下列零組件隨本機提供。若有任何遺漏，立刻咨詢您的 JVC 汽車音響經銷商。  
A / B  
C
D
Hard case/Control panel  
Sleeve  
外套機殼  
Trim plate  
硬盒/控制面  
裝飾框  
板
E
F
G
H
Power cord  
電路連接用的配線束  
Washer (ø5)  
墊圈（ø5）  
Lock nut (M5)  
鎖定螺母（M5）  
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm, M5 × 12.5 mm)  
緊固螺栓（M4 × 5 mm, M5 × 12.5 mm）  
I
J
K
L
Rubber cushion  
橡膠防震墊  
Handles  
板條型把手  
Remote controller  
遙控器  
Battery  
電池  
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
安裝（裝設、固定在儀表板內）  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
下面的圖解表示了典型的安裝程序。如果您有問題，或需要 有關配套元件的資料，請向 JVC  
汽車音響分銷商或配套元件供應公司詢問。  
• 如果您不能確定如何正確地安裝本機，應請合格的技術人員來安裝。  
Do the required electrical connections.  
進行所需的電路連接。  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
弄彎機殼的突舌，把外套機殼牢固  
在
儀表板內。  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
拆卸本機  
在拆卸本機前  
，應將本機後部的固定和連接部分鬆開。  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
按圖所示，將兩片板條型把手插入卡槽，然後  
輕穩地從兩側向  
外拉兩片把手，本機隨之拉  
出。  
When using the optional stay / 若選用支撐架  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / 若不使用外套機殼安裝本機  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
以豐田牌（TOYOTA）汽車為例：首先取出汽車收音機，然後將本機裝入其空出的位置  
。
Stay (option)  
支撐架（選用的）  
Fire wall  
防火板  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
平頭螺絲釘（M5 × 8 mm）*2  
Dashboard  
儀表板  
Bracket*2  
托座*2  
Screw (option)  
螺絲釘（選用的）  
Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
平頭螺絲釘（M5 × 8 mm）*2  
Pocket  
空殼  
Bracket*2  
托座*2  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
: 把本機安裝在托座上時，務必使用 8 mm 長的螺絲釘。如使用過長的螺絲釘，會損壞本機。  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
將本機安裝在少於 30˚ 的角度  
。
注意  
1
2
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
您豎起本機時，小心不要 損壞底部的保險 絲。  
不隨本機提供。  
2
2
ENGLISH  
中文  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
電路連接  
A Typical connections / 典型的接線方法  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
接線前：仔細檢查汽車內的線路。不正確的接線會導致本機嚴重 損壞。  
電源線的引線和車身的連接器引線在顏色上可能有所不同。  
1 依照下圖所示之次序連接電源線的顏色導線。  
2 將天線的電線連接起來。  
3 最後，把配線束的插頭插在本機上。  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
Line out (see diagram  
輸出端子 (參閱圖表  
)
）
Rear ground terminal  
本機後背接地端子  
Antenna terminal  
15 A fuse  
15 A 保險  
天線端子  
絲
Ignition switch  
點火開關  
Black  
黑色  
To the metallic body or chassis of the car  
接至金屬體或汽車底盤  
Yellow *2  
黃色 *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
接至保險 絲單元內的帶電端子，保險 絲單元與車裝電池相  
連接（用於旁路點火開關）（恆定 12 V）  
Fuse block  
保險 絲單元  
Red  
紅色  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
接至保險 絲單元內的附屬端子  
Blue  
藍色  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
接至自動天線（若有裝設）（最大 250 mA）  
Blue with white stripe  
藍色帶有白色條紋  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
連接至其他裝置上的遙控導線（最大 200 mA）  
Orange with white stripe  
橙色帶有白色條紋  
To car light control switch  
連接至車燈控制開關  
White with black stripe  
白色帶有黑色條紋  
Gray with black stripe  
灰色帶有黑色條紋  
Gray  
灰色  
Green with black stripe  
綠色帶有黑色條紋  
Green  
綠色  
Purple with black stripe  
Purple  
紫色  
White  
白色  
紫色帶有黑色條紋  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Left speaker (rear)  
左揚聲器（前  
置
）
右揚聲器（前  
置
）
右揚聲器（後置  
）
左揚聲器（後置  
）
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*1 不隨本機提供。  
2 本機未安裝時，進行工作狀況  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power  
cannot be turned on.  
*
檢查之前  
，必須把這導線接上，否則  
不能開啟電源  
。
3
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / 連接至外部功率放大器和 / 或重低音揚聲器  
B
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
您可以連接功率放大器以提昇尊  
將遙控導線（藍色帶有白色條紋）和其他裝置上的遙控導線連接起來，以便可以經由本機進行  
遙控。  
• 將揚聲器和本機拔開，再接上功率放大器。將本機的揚聲器接線放置不用。  
車的音響系統。  
•
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Y-型連接導線（不隨本機提供）  
Front speakers  
前
置
揚聲器  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC 功率放大器  
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page  
13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
將“L/O MODE”設定  
Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W” (See  
page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
將“L/O MODE”設定為  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
遙控導線（藍色帶有白色條紋）  
為“REAR”（參閱使用說明書  
“SUB.W”（參閱使用說明書  
的第 13 頁。）  
的第 13 頁。）  
To the remote lead of other  
equipment or automatic  
antenna if any  
You can connect a power amplifier for  
rear speakers.  
You can also connect a subwoofer to  
the REAR LINE OUT terminals.  
您也可以將重 低音揚聲器連接至 REAR  
LINE OUT 端子。  
您可為後置  
揚聲器連接功率放大器。  
連接至其他裝置  
上的遙控  
導線或自動天線（若有  
裝設）  
or  
或
Subwoofer  
Rear speakers  
後置揚聲器  
重
低音揚聲器  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC 功率放大器  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC 功率放大器  
Front speakers  
揚聲器  
前
置
3
4
3
4
*
*
Remote lead  
*
*
遙控導線  
將地線與金屬車體或者汽車底盤緊密連接，連接處應該沒有被油漆覆蓋（如果已塗上油漆，在連接電  
線前，將油漆刮去）。如果不這樣做，可能會損壞本機。  
信號電纜（不隨本機提供）  
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint  
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
5
5
*
*
TROUBLESHOOTING  
故障排除  
• The fuse blows.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
• 保險絲燒斷。  
* 檢查紅色導線接頭和黑色導線接頭是否接觸正確?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• 電源不能接通。  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* 檢查黃色導線接頭是否接上?  
• 揚聲器沒有聲音。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出導線接頭是否短路?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
• 聲音失真。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?  
* 檢查揚聲器的左（L）、右（R）端子的負極（–）是否共同接地?  
• Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• 噪音干擾音響。  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* 後接地端子與車身是否使用較短和較厚  
的電線連接?  
• 本機發熱。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?  
* 檢查揚聲器的左（L）、右（R）端子的負極（–）是否共同接地?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• 本機完全不能操作。  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
* 您是否已經重  
置您的機組?  
4

Archos AV300 Series User Manual
Blaupunkt COLORADO RCR 168 User Manual
Bontrager 253427 User Manual
Boston Acoustics SC55 User Manual
Bushnell 620726 User Manual
Datexx ECO CALC DD 880 User Manual
Havis Shields S UMM AMR MTX User Manual
Insignia NS A1200 User Manual
JVC CS V414 User Manual
JVC GR AX780 User Manual